Compare commits

..

151 Commits

Author SHA1 Message Date
popcornmix
276dc46ac7 vchiq: Allocation does not need to be atomic 2015-04-29 18:02:56 +01:00
Phil Elwell
6ee7bbc209 Merge pull request #947 from notro/mmc
Use bcm2835-mmc driver on ARCH_BCM2835
2015-04-29 18:01:53 +01:00
Noralf Trønnes
f127c57867 bcm2835: Change to use bcm2835-mmc in Device Tree
Use downstream bcm2835-mmc driver to get increased throughput
and DMA support.

Signed-off-by: Noralf Trønnes <noralf@tronnes.org>
2015-04-29 17:29:04 +02:00
Noralf Trønnes
ab96dd85f8 bcm2835: bcm2835_defconfig enable MMC_BCM2835
Enable the downstream bcm2835-mmc driver and DMA support.

Signed-off-by: Noralf Trønnes <noralf@tronnes.org>
2015-04-29 17:28:22 +02:00
Noralf Trønnes
56b6f708b8 mmc: bcm2835-mmc: Make available on ARCH_BCM2835
Make the bcm2835-mmc driver available for use on ARCH_BCM2835.

Signed-off-by: Noralf Trønnes <noralf@tronnes.org>
2015-04-29 17:24:46 +02:00
Noralf Trønnes
83f9ea7e3e bcm2835: bcm2835_defconfig
Some options in bcm2835_defconfig are now the default and
some have changed. Update to keep functionality.

No longer available: SCSI_MULTI_LUN and RESOURCE_COUNTERS.

Signed-off-by: Noralf Trønnes <noralf@tronnes.org>
2015-04-29 17:24:02 +02:00
popcornmix
3140e4a5d1 Squash: Inlcude ARCH_BCM2835 in depends for bcm2835-sdhost 2015-04-29 16:04:40 +01:00
Phil Elwell
154a21d6f0 Squash: Make delay_after_stop a DT parameter, defaulting to zero 2015-04-29 16:04:40 +01:00
popcornmix
f7087bb5ad Merge pull request #945 from notro/dma
Make legacy DMA API available on ARCH_BCM2835
2015-04-29 16:03:50 +01:00
Phil Elwell
af4d42cf8b Adding bcm2835-sdhost driver, and an overlay to enable it
BCM2835 has two SD card interfaces. This driver uses the other one.
2015-04-29 11:17:46 +01:00
Phil Elwell
3d71332faa Add blk_pos parameter to mmc multi_io_quirk callback 2015-04-29 11:17:34 +01:00
popcornmix
809f81562f Revert "Add blk_pos parameter to mmc multi_io_quirk callback"
This reverts commit c8ffccdae8.
2015-04-29 11:16:52 +01:00
popcornmix
447841c345 Revert "Adding bcm2835-sdhost driver, and an overlay to enable it"
This reverts commit d441bcbae8.
2015-04-29 11:16:36 +01:00
popcornmix
3268698b51 bcm2835-mmc: Default to disabling MMC_QUIRK_BLK_NO_CMD23 2015-04-28 19:29:54 +01:00
Noralf Trønnes
b1020b5d56 BCM270x: Remove dmaman device
Remove the dmaman device since the dmaengine now handles
the legacy API manager.

Signed-off-by: Noralf Trønnes <noralf@tronnes.org>
2015-04-28 19:54:17 +02:00
Noralf Trønnes
f89ecdc921 BCM270x: dma: Remove driver
Remove dma.c driver which is now merged with bcm2708-dmaengine.

Signed-off-by: Noralf Trønnes <noralf@tronnes.org>
2015-04-28 19:26:59 +02:00
Noralf Trønnes
1c3f58d691 dmaengine: bcm2708: Merge with arch dma.c driver and disable dma.c
Merge the legacy DMA API driver with bcm2708-dmaengine.
This is done so we can use bcm2708_fb on ARCH_BCM2835 (mailbox
driver is also needed).

Changes to the dma.c code:
- Use BIT() macro.
- Cutdown some comments to one line.
- Add mutex to vc_dmaman and use this, since the dev lock is locked
  during probing of the engine part.
- Add global g_dmaman variable since drvdata is used by the engine part.
- Restructure for readability:
  vc_dmaman_chan_alloc()
  vc_dmaman_chan_free()
  bcm_dma_chan_free()
- Restructure bcm_dma_chan_alloc() to simplify error handling.
- Use device irq resources instead of hardcoded bcm_dma_irqs table.
- Remove dev_dmaman_register() and code it directly.
- Remove dev_dmaman_deregister() and code it directly.
- Simplify bcm_dmaman_probe() using devm_* functions.
- Get dmachans from DT if available.
- Keep 'dma.dmachans' module argument name for backwards compatibility.

Make it available on ARCH_BCM2835 as well.

Signed-off-by: Noralf Trønnes <noralf@tronnes.org>
2015-04-28 19:25:43 +02:00
Noralf Trønnes
0454dbb6f0 BCM270x: Add memory and irq resources to dmaengine device and DT
Prepare for merging of the legacy DMA API arch driver dma.c
with bcm2708-dmaengine by adding memory and irq resources both
to platform file device and Device Tree node.
Don't use BCM_DMAMAN_DRIVER_NAME so we don't have to include mach/dma.h

Signed-off-by: Noralf Trønnes <noralf@tronnes.org>
2015-04-28 19:24:30 +02:00
popcornmix
8d7a5a2365 fixup! 8192cu needs old wireless extensions 2015-04-23 15:57:47 +01:00
Phil Elwell
d441bcbae8 Adding bcm2835-sdhost driver, and an overlay to enable it
BCM2835 has two SD card interfaces. This driver uses the other one.
2015-04-23 15:52:46 +01:00
Phil Elwell
c8ffccdae8 Add blk_pos parameter to mmc multi_io_quirk callback 2015-04-23 15:52:04 +01:00
popcornmix
07d2cffdda fixup! bcm2708 framebuffer driver 2015-04-23 12:47:18 +01:00
popcornmix
aba1c973cc fixup! MMC: added alternative MMC driver 2015-04-23 12:21:53 +01:00
popcornmix
7d253ca5b2 bcm2835-mmc: Add option to disable some delays 2015-04-22 20:31:12 +01:00
Peter Kümmel
dd5b0e491a 8192cu needs old wireless extensions
The obsolete WIRELESS_EXT configuration is used
by the old Realtek code and is needed for AP support.
2015-04-22 16:18:31 +01:00
popcornmix
ed9e73db29 alsa: Make interrupted close paths quieter 2015-04-22 16:18:30 +01:00
popcornmix
07a5d16b16 alsa: Ensure mutexes are released through error paths 2015-04-21 17:41:54 +01:00
popcornmix
8a38de5af2 fixup! Add 2709 platform for Raspberry Pi 2 2015-04-18 19:00:17 +01:00
popcornmix
d34769dd16 bcm2835-mmc: Add option to disable MMC_QUIRK_BLK_NO_CMD23 2015-04-18 17:25:50 +01:00
popcornmix
622cc72335 bcm2708-dmaengine: Add debug options 2015-04-18 17:25:49 +01:00
popcornmix
86662dfeb7 Merge pull request #935 from pranith/rpi-4.0.y
vcsm: Use boolean as it cannot be built as module
2015-04-18 12:10:19 +01:00
Pranith Kumar
0e189c130a vcsm: Use boolean as it cannot be built as module
On building the bcm_vc_sm as a module we get the following error:

v7_dma_flush_range and do_munmap are undefined in vc-sm.ko.

Fix by making it not an option to build as module
2015-04-17 20:49:33 -04:00
Daniel Matuschek
a82d9527ee HiFiBerry Digi: set SPDIF status bits for sample rate
The HiFiBerry Digi driver did not signal the sample rate in the SPDIF status bits.
While this is optional, some DACs and receivers do not accept this signal. This patch
adds the sample rate bits in the SPDIF status block.
2015-04-17 19:43:39 +01:00
popcornmix
3cc7bbf607 smsc95xx: Disable turbo mode by default 2015-04-17 16:58:45 +01:00
Steve Glendinning
a39c7de2b0 smsx95xx: fix crimes against truesize
smsc95xx is adjusting truesize when it shouldn't, and following a recent patch from Eric this is now triggering warnings.

This patch stops smsc95xx from changing truesize.

Signed-off-by: Steve Glendinning <steve.glendinning@smsc.com>
2015-04-17 16:57:43 +01:00
Martin Sperl
9359f0b21a spi: bcm2835: change timeout of polling driver to 1s
The way that the timeout code is written in the polling function
the timeout does also trigger when interrupted or rescheduled while
in the polling loop.

This patch changes the timeout from effectively 20ms (=2 jiffies) to
1 second and removes the time that the transfer really takes out of
the computation, as - per design - this is <30us and the jiffie resolution
is 10ms so that does not make any difference what so ever.

Signed-off-by: Martin Sperl <kernel@martin.sperl.org>
2015-04-16 21:24:39 +01:00
Martin Sperl
f66b21b2c4 spi: bcm2835: enabling polling mode for transfers shorter than 30us
In cases of short transfer times the CPU is spending lots of time
in the interrupt handler and scheduler to reschedule the worker thread.

Measurements show that we have times where it takes 29.32us to between
the last clock change and the time that the worker-thread is running again
returning from wait_for_completion_timeout().

During this time the interrupt-handler is running calling complete()
and then also the scheduler is rescheduling the worker thread.

This time can vary depending on how much of the code is still in
CPU-caches, when there is a burst of spi transfers the subsequent delays
are in the order of 25us, so the value of 30us seems reasonable.

With polling the whole transfer of 4 bytes at 10MHz finishes after 6.16us
(CS down to up) with the real transfer (clock running) taking 3.56us.
So the efficiency has much improved and is also freeing CPU cycles,
reducing interrupts and context switches.

Because of the above 30us seems to be a reasonable limit for polling.

Signed-off-by: Martin Sperl <kernel@martin.sperl.org>
Signed-off-by: Mark Brown <broonie@kernel.org>
2015-04-16 21:24:39 +01:00
Martin Sperl
c62365f3e4 spi: bcm2835: transform native-cs to gpio-cs on first spi_setup
Transforms the bcm-2835 native SPI-chip select to their gpio-cs equivalent.

This allows for some support of some optimizations that are not
possible due to HW-gliches on the CS line - especially filling
the FIFO before enabling SPI interrupts (by writing to CS register)
while the transfer is already in progress (See commit: e3a2be3030)

This patch also works arround some issues in bcm2835-pinctrl which does not
set the value when setting the GPIO as output - it just sets up output and
(typically) leaves the GPIO as low.  When a fix for this is merged then this
gpio_set_value can get removed from bcm2835_spi_setup.

Signed-off-by: Martin Sperl <kernel@martin.sperl.org>
Signed-off-by: Mark Brown <broonie@kernel.org>
2015-04-16 21:24:38 +01:00
Martin Sperl
db1e62a6a8 spi: bcm2835: fill FIFO before enabling interrupts to reduce interrupts/message
To reduce the number of interrupts/message we fill the FIFO before
enabling interrupts - for short messages this reduces the interrupt count
from 2 to 1 interrupt.

There have been rare cases where short (<200ns) chip-select switches with
native CS have been observed during such operation, this is why this
optimization is only enabled for GPIO-CS.

Signed-off-by: Martin Sperl <kernel@martin.sperl.org>
Tested-by: Martin Sperl <kernel@martin.sperl.org>
Signed-off-by: Mark Brown <broonie@kernel.org>
2015-04-16 21:24:38 +01:00
Martin Sperl
eaca895096 spi: bcm2835: fix code formatting issue
Signed-off-by: Martin Sperl <kernel@martin.sperl.org>
Tested-by: Martin Sperl <kernel@martin.sperl.org>
Signed-off-by: Mark Brown <broonie@kernel.org>
2015-04-16 21:24:38 +01:00
Martin Sperl
02326c9faf spi: bcm2835: move to the transfer_one driver model
This also allows for GPIO-CS to get used removing the limitation of
2/3 SPI devises on the SPI bus.

Fixes: spi-cs-high with native CS with multiple devices on the spi-bus
resetting the chip selects to "normal" polarity after a finished
transfer.

No other functionality/improvements added.

Tested with the following 4 devices on the spi-bus:
* mcp2515 with native CS
* mcp2515 with gpio CS
* fb_st7735r with native CS
    (plus spi-cs-high via transistor inverting polarity)
* enc28j60 with gpio-CS
Tested-by: Martin Sperl <kernel@martin.sperl.org>

Signed-off-by: Martin Sperl <kernel@martin.sperl.org>
Signed-off-by: Mark Brown <broonie@kernel.org>
2015-04-16 21:24:38 +01:00
Martin Sperl
cf39d75223 spi: bcm2835: enable support of 3-wire mode
Signed-off-by: Martin Sperl <kernel@martin.sperl.org>
Signed-off-by: Mark Brown <broonie@kernel.org>
2015-04-16 21:24:37 +01:00
Martin Sperl
e491345381 spi: bcm2835: clock divider can be a multiple of 2
The official documentation is wrong in this respect.
Has been tested empirically for dividers 2-1024

Signed-off-by: Martin Sperl <kernel@martin.sperl.org>
Signed-off-by: Mark Brown <broonie@kernel.org>
2015-04-16 21:24:37 +01:00
Martin Sperl
0368652aef spi: bcm2835: fill/drain SPI-fifo as much as possible during interrupt
Implement the recommendation from the BCM2835 data-sheet
with regards to polling drivers to fill/drain the FIFO as much data as possible
also for the interrupt-driven case (which this driver is making use of).

This means that for long transfers (>64bytes) we need one interrupt
every 64 bytes instead of every 12 bytes, as the FIFO is 16 words (not bytes) wide.

Tested with mcp251x (can bus), fb_st7735 (TFT framebuffer device)
and enc28j60 (ethernet) drivers.

Signed-off-by: Martin Sperl <kernel@martin.sperl.org>
Signed-off-by: Mark Brown <broonie@kernel.org>
2015-04-16 21:24:37 +01:00
Martin Sperl
1f93a1bb58 spi: bcm2835: fix all checkpath --strict messages
The following errors/warnings issued by checkpatch.pl --strict have been fixed:
drivers/spi/spi-bcm2835.c:182: CHECK: Alignment should match open parenthesis
drivers/spi/spi-bcm2835.c:191: CHECK: braces {} should be used on all arms of this statement
drivers/spi/spi-bcm2835.c:234: CHECK: Alignment should match open parenthesis
drivers/spi/spi-bcm2835.c:256: CHECK: Alignment should match open parenthesis
drivers/spi/spi-bcm2835.c:271: CHECK: Alignment should match open parenthesis
drivers/spi/spi-bcm2835.c:346: CHECK: Alignment should match open parenthesis
total: 0 errors, 0 warnings, 6 checks, 403 lines checked

In 2 locations the arguments had to get split/moved to the next line so that the
line width stays below 80 chars.

Signed-off-by: Martin Sperl <kernel@martin.sperl.org>
Signed-off-by: Mark Brown <broonie@kernel.org>
2015-04-16 21:24:37 +01:00
popcornmix
88f741c7a1 bcm2835-mmc: Add range of debug options for slowing things down 2015-04-14 00:04:39 +01:00
Jakub Kicinski
bce11746ae bcm2708: fix uart1 parameters
System clock is 250MHz, but the device uses a non-standard
oversampling rate (8 instead of 16) hence the clock rate
has to be multiplied by 16/8 = 2.  Currently the clock
rate seems to be divided by 2.

Also correct the .type and .flags.

Signed-off-by: Jakub Kicinski <kubakici@wp.pl>
2015-04-14 00:04:35 +01:00
popcornmix
f431558158 config: Add default configs 2015-04-13 21:45:19 +01:00
Clive Messer
b7af628aa7 Add Device Tree support for RPi-DAC. 2015-04-13 21:45:18 +01:00
Waldemar Brodkorb
12cb37f068 Add driver for rpi-proto
Forward port of 3.10.x driver from https://github.com/koalo
We are using a custom board and would like to use rpi 3.18.x
kernel. Patch works fine for our embedded system.

URL to the audio chip:
http://www.mikroe.com/add-on-boards/audio-voice/audio-codec-proto/

Playback tested with devicetree enabled.

Signed-off-by: Waldemar Brodkorb <wbrodkorb@conet.de>
2015-04-13 21:45:17 +01:00
Phil Elwell
f56cbd371a BCM270x_DT: Refactor bcm2708.dtsi and bcm2709.dtsi
Extract the common elements, creating bcm2708_common.dtsi
2015-04-13 21:45:16 +01:00
Noralf Trønnes
a63495e57a BCM270x_DT: add bcm2835-mmc entry
Add Device Tree entry for bcm2835-mmc.
In non-DT mode, don't add the device in the board file.

Signed-off-by: Noralf Trønnes <noralf@tronnes.org>
2015-04-13 21:45:15 +01:00
Noralf Trønnes
839ccef845 bcm270x: add mmc-bcm2835 clock
Add clock for the mmc-bcm2835.0 device.
Will be used in non-DT mode.

Signed-off-by: Noralf Trønnes <noralf@tronnes.org>
2015-04-13 21:45:14 +01:00
Noralf Trønnes
35e87da27e BCM270x_DT: add bcm2835-dma entry
Add Device Tree entry for bcm2835-dma.
The entry doesn't contain any resources since they are handled
by the arch/arm/mach-bcm270x/dma.c driver.
In non-DT mode, don't add the device in the board file.

Signed-off-by: Noralf Trønnes <noralf@tronnes.org>
2015-04-13 21:45:13 +01:00
Noralf Trønnes
769a0ed18b dts: overlay: rpi-display: pullup irq gpio
An early version of rpi-display needs the touch controller irq
to be pulled up. This is the version with 9-bit SPI as default.

Signed-off-by: Noralf Trønnes <noralf@tronnes.org>
2015-04-13 21:45:12 +01:00
Noralf Trønnes
bf6b7e4a90 dts: overlay: piscreen: set speed to 24MHz
Some of the displays can't handle the 32MHz speed.
Lower the default speed to 24MHz.

Signed-off-by: Noralf Trønnes <noralf@tronnes.org>
2015-04-13 21:45:12 +01:00
Noralf Trønnes
4f2bbfbc4e dts: overlay: add support for MZ61581 display
Add Device Tree overlay for MZ61581 display by Tontec.

Signed-off-by: Noralf Trønnes <noralf@tronnes.org>
2015-04-13 21:45:11 +01:00
Martin Sperl
27146e2543 enable compiling spi-bcm2835 and add overlay to allow us to load the driver 2015-04-13 21:45:10 +01:00
Noralf Trønnes
ebb0b22786 dts: overlay: add support for Adafruit PiTFT
Add DT overlay for the Adafruit PiTFT 2.8" resistive touch screen

Signed-off-by: Noralf Trønnes <noralf@tronnes.org>
2015-04-13 21:45:09 +01:00
Phil Elwell
91f5fc8b4e enc28j60: Add device tree compatible string and an overlay 2015-04-13 21:45:08 +01:00
Noralf Trønnes
c3797a11f4 dts: overlay: add support for PiScreen display
Add Device Tree overlay for PiScreen display by OzzMaker.com

Signed-off-by: Noralf Trønnes <noralf@tronnes.org>
2015-04-13 21:45:07 +01:00
Noralf Trønnes
e8390ff876 dts: overlay: add support for HY28B display
Add Device Tree overlay for HY28B display by HAOYU Electronics.
Default values are set to match Texy's display shield.

Signed-off-by: Noralf Trønnes <noralf@tronnes.org>
2015-04-13 21:45:06 +01:00
Noralf Trønnes
1bef338fba dts: overlay: add support for HY28A display
Add Device Tree overlay for HY28A display by HAOYU Electronics.
Default values are set to match Texy's display shield.

Signed-off-by: Noralf Trønnes <noralf@tronnes.org>
2015-04-13 21:45:06 +01:00
Noralf Trønnes
2a5fa11405 dts: overlay: add support for rpi-display
Add Device Tree overlay for rpi-display by Watterott.

Signed-off-by: Noralf Trønnes <noralf@tronnes.org>
2015-04-13 21:45:05 +01:00
Jon Burgess
77fa1da74d Create generic i2c-rtc overlay for supporting ds1307, ds3231, pcf2127 and pcf8523.
Signed-off-by: Jon Burgess <jburgess777@gmail.com>
2015-04-13 21:45:04 +01:00
Dave Martin
0d6a4ef40f serial/amba-pl011: Refactor and simplify TX FIFO handling
Commit 734745c serial/amba-pl011: Activate TX IRQ passively
adds some complexity and overhead in the form of a softirq
mechanism for transmitting in the absence of interrupts.

This patch simplifies the code flow to reduce the reliance on
subtle behaviour and avoid fragility under future maintenance.

To this end, the TX softirq mechanism is removed and instead
pl011_start_tx() will now simply stuff the FIFO until full
(guaranteeing future TX IRQs), or until there are no more chars
to write (in which case we don't care whether an IRQ happens).

Signed-off-by: Dave Martin <Dave.Martin@xxxxxxx>
Signed-off-by: Jakub Kicinski <kubakici@xxxxx>
2015-04-13 21:45:03 +01:00
Dave Martin
3a947dacb9 serial/amba-pl011: Activate TX IRQ passively
The current PL011 driver transmits a dummy character when the UART
is opened, to assert the TX IRQ for the first time
(see pl011_startup()).  The UART is put in loopback mode temporarily,
so the receiver presumably shouldn't see anything.

However...

At least some platforms containing a PL011 send characters down the
wire even when loopback mode is enabled.  This means that a
spurious NUL character may be seen at the receiver when the PL011 is
opened through the TTY layer.

The current code also temporarily sets the baud rate to maximum and
the character width to the minimum, to that the dummy TX completes
as quickly as possible.  If this is seen by the receiver it will
result in a framing error and can knock the receiver out of sync --
turning subsequent output into garbage until synchronisation
is reestablished.  (Particularly problematic during boot with systemd.)

To avoid spurious transmissions, this patch removes assumptions about
whether the TX IRQ will fire until at least one TX IRQ has been seen.

Instead, the UART will unmask the TX IRQ and then slow-start via
polling and timer-based soft IRQs initially.  If the TTY layer writes
enough data to fill the FIFO to the interrupt threshold in one go,
the TX IRQ should assert, at which point the driver changes to
fully interrupt-driven TX.

In this way, the TX IRQ is activated as a side-effect instead of
being done deliberately.

This should also mean that the driver works on the SBSA Generic
UART[1] (a cut-down PL011) without invasive changes.  The Generic
UART lacks some features needed for the dummy TX approach to work
(FIFO disabling and loopback).

[1] Server Base System Architecture (ARM-DEN-0029-v2.3)
    http://infocenter.arm.com/
    (click-thru required :/)

Signed-off-by: Dave Martin <Dave.Martin@xxxxxxx>
2015-04-13 21:45:02 +01:00
Phil Elwell
f5b6bc19d1 pinctrl-bcm2835: Only request the interrupts listed in the DTB
Although the GPIO controller can generate three interrupts (four counting
the common one), the device tree files currently only specify two. In the
absence of the third, simply don't register that interrupt (as opposed to
registering 0), which has the effect of making it impossible to generate
interrupts for GPIOs 46-53 which, since they share pins with the SD card
interface, is unlikely to be a problem.
2015-04-13 21:45:01 +01:00
Phil Elwell
022f1df186 pinctrl-bcm2835: Fix interrupt handling for GPIOs 28-31 and 46-53
Contrary to the documentation, the BCM2835 GPIO controller actually has
four interrupt lines - one each for the three IRQ groups and one common. Rather
confusingly, the GPIO interrupt groups don't correspond directly with the GPIO
control banks. Instead, GPIOs 0-27 generate IRQ GPIO0, 28-45 GPIO1 and
46-53 GPIO2.

Awkwardly, the GPIOS for IRQ GPIO1 straddle two 32-entry GPIO banks, so it is
cleaner to split out a function to process the interrupts for a single GPIO
bank.

This bug has only just been observed because GPIOs above 27 can only be
accessed on an old Raspberry Pi with the optional P5 header fitted, where
the pins are often used for I2S instead.
2015-04-13 21:45:00 +01:00
Rainer Herbers
ca0cb9b48a Create bmp085_i2c-sensor-overlay.dts and update Makefile 2015-04-13 21:44:59 +01:00
Phil Elwell
be003e4b0a Fix LED "input" trigger implementation for 3.19 2015-04-13 21:44:58 +01:00
jeanleflambeur
f0ea57ba45 Fix grabbing lock from atomic context in i2c driver
2 main changes:
- check for timeouts in the bcm2708_bsc_setup function as indicated by this comment:
      /* poll for transfer start bit (should only take 1-20 polls) */
  This implies that the setup function can now fail so account for this everywhere it's called
- Removed the clk_get_rate call from inside the setup function as it locks a mutex and that's not ok since we call it from under a spin lock.

removed dead code and update comment

fixed typo in comment
2015-04-13 21:44:57 +01:00
android
9e27b05bac BCM2708_VCIO : Add automatic creation of device node 2015-04-13 21:44:57 +01:00
Byron Bradley
207ab406d2 Add device-tree overlay for pcf2127
Signed-off-by: Byron Bradley <byronb@afterthoughtsoftware.com>
2015-04-13 21:44:56 +01:00
Phil Elwell
a1023c789f i2c_bcm2708: Fix clock reference counting 2015-04-13 21:44:55 +01:00
Phil Elwell
287692c14f w1-gpio: Sort out the pullup/parasitic power tangle 2015-04-13 21:44:54 +01:00
Phil Elwell
0676e97f9c pinctrl-bcm2835: bcm2835_gpio_direction_output must set the value 2015-04-13 21:44:53 +01:00
Phil Elwell
ef2f91728c BCM270x_DT: Add i2c0_baudrate and i2c1_baudrate parameters 2015-04-13 21:44:52 +01:00
Daniel Matuschek
8d55ebdbcf HiFiBerry Amp: fix device-tree problems
Some code to load the driver based on device-tree-overlays was missing. This is added by this patch.
2015-04-13 21:44:51 +01:00
popcornmix
4726f86e2e bcm2709: Simplify and strip down IRQ handler 2015-04-13 21:44:50 +01:00
Phil Elwell
c1fe7419b6 BCM270x_DT: Add pwr_led, and the required "input" trigger
The "input" trigger makes the associated GPIO an input.  This is to support
the Raspberry Pi PWR LED, which is driven by external hardware in normal use.

N.B. pwr_led is not available on Model A or B boards.
2015-04-13 21:44:49 +01:00
Ryan Coe
bbfe16a4fc Add device-tree overlay for ds1307
Signed-off-by: Ryan Coe <bluemrp9@gmail.com>
2015-04-13 21:44:49 +01:00
Ryan Coe
b2c3156102 Update ds1307 driver for device-tree support
Signed-off-by: Ryan Coe <bluemrp9@gmail.com>
2015-04-13 21:44:48 +01:00
Joerg Hohensohn
2d72def2f4 bugfix for 32kHz sample rate, was missing 2015-04-13 21:44:47 +01:00
Daniel Matuschek
7a0984414c Add a parameter to turn off SPDIF output if no audio is playing
This patch adds the paramater auto_shutdown_output to the kernel module.
Default behaviour of the module is the same, but when auto_shutdown_output
is set to 1, the SPDIF oputput will shutdown if no stream is playing.
2015-04-13 21:44:46 +01:00
Phil Elwell
96bd7ad2a1 BCM2708_DT: Add pcf8523-rtc overlay 2015-04-13 21:44:45 +01:00
Serge Schneider
b8c70f8ccc I2C: Only register the I2C device for the current board revision 2015-04-13 21:44:44 +01:00
Timo Kokkonen
60c1124fe4 Added support to reserve/enable a GPIO pin to be used from pps-gpio module (LinuxPPS). Enable PPS modules in default config for RPi. 2015-04-13 21:44:43 +01:00
Phil Elwell
b50a5ee5eb Add pps-gpio DT overlay
Parameters:
    gpiopin=<input pin>    // Default 18
2015-04-13 21:44:42 +01:00
Daniel Matuschek
4d814ab725 Add device tree overlay for HiFiBerry Amp/Amp+
This patch add the missing device tree file for the HiFiBerry Amp and Amp+ boards.
2015-04-13 21:44:41 +01:00
Phil Elwell
e97da0a41f BCM2708_DT: Build the overlays as well 2015-04-13 21:44:40 +01:00
Phil Elwell
82b431db72 scripts/dtc: Update to upstream version with overlay patches 2015-04-13 21:44:39 +01:00
Daniel Matuschek
332f2e7146 TAS5713: return error if initialisation fails
Existing TAS5713 driver logs errors during initialisation, but does not return
an error code. Therefore even if initialisation fails, the driver will still be
loaded, but won't work. This patch fixes this. I2C communication error will now
reported correctly by a non-zero return code.
2015-04-13 21:44:38 +01:00
Phil Elwell
3a26e7bd23 Adding w1-gpio device tree overlays
N.B. Requires firmware supporting multi-target overrides

w1-gpio-overlay:
  Use if a pullup pin is not required.
  Parameters:
    gpiopin=<i/o pin>     // default 4

w1-gpio-pullup-overlay:
  Use if a pullup pin is required.
  Parameters:
    gpiopin=<i/o pin>     // default 4
    pullup=<pullup pin>   // default 5
2015-04-13 21:44:38 +01:00
Phil Elwell
1b32ff2126 Fix the activity LED in DT mode
Add a "leds" node to the base DTBs, and a subnode for the activity
LED. You can change the LED function like this:

  dtparam=act_led_trigger=heartbeat

Add aliases for the other main nodes (soc, intc).

Issue: linux #757
2015-04-13 21:44:37 +01:00
Phil Elwell
f00a062fc9 lirc-rpi: Add device tree support, and a suitable overlay
The overlay supports DT parameters that match the old module
parameters, except that gpio_in_pull should be set using the
strings "up", "down" or "off".

lirc-rpi: Also support pinctrl-bcm2835 in non-DT mode
2015-04-13 21:44:36 +01:00
Phil Elwell
c68c6b48a8 DT: Add overrides to enable i2c0, i2c1, spi and i2s 2015-04-13 21:44:35 +01:00
Phil Elwell
fb571c963a fdt: Add support for the CONFIG_CMDLINE_EXTEND option 2015-04-13 21:44:34 +01:00
popcornmix
802ce94f95 Adding Device Tree support for some RPi audio cards 2015-04-13 21:44:33 +01:00
Phil Elwell
7c66acaf17 bcm2708: Allow option card devices to be configured via DT
If the kernel is built with Device Tree support, and if a DT blob
is provided for the kernel at boot time, then the platform devices
for option cards are not created. This avoids both the need to
blacklist unwanted devices, and the need to update the board
support code with each new device.
2015-04-13 21:44:32 +01:00
Daniel Matuschek
f8782d06b4 Added driver for HiFiBerry Amp amplifier add-on board
The driver contains a low-level hardware driver for the TAS5713 and the
drivers for the Raspberry Pi I2S subsystem.
2015-04-13 21:44:31 +01:00
Daniel Matuschek
336da88773 Added support for HiFiBerry DAC+
The driver is based on the HiFiBerry DAC driver. However HiFiBerry DAC+ uses
a different codec chip (PCM5122), therefore a new driver is necessary.
2015-04-13 21:44:31 +01:00
popcornmix
b3b5a6a88f Revert "ARM: dma: Use dma_pfn_offset for dma address translation"
This reverts commit 6ce0d20016.
2015-04-13 21:44:30 +01:00
P33M
63a1604f3d usb: core: make overcurrent messages more prominent
Hub overcurrent messages are more serious than "debug". Increase loglevel.
2015-04-13 21:44:29 +01:00
popcornmix
ac1ca128ec hid: Reduce default mouse polling interval to 60Hz
Reduces overhead when using X
2015-04-13 21:44:28 +01:00
notro
f6cf1fa73e i2c: bcm2708: add device tree support
Add DT support to driver and add to .dtsi file.
Setup pins in .dts file.
i2c is disabled by default.

Signed-off-by: Noralf Tronnes <notro@tronnes.org>

bcm2708: don't register i2c controllers when using DT

The devices for the i2c controllers are in the Device Tree.
Only register devices when not using DT.

Signed-off-by: Noralf Tronnes <notro@tronnes.org>

i2c: bcm2835: make driver available on ARCH_BCM2708

Make this driver available on ARCH_BCM2708

Signed-off-by: Noralf Tronnes <notro@tronnes.org>
2015-04-13 21:44:27 +01:00
notro
0f6f0a0a6b spi: bcm2708: add device tree support
Add DT support to driver and add to .dtsi file.
Setup pins and spidev in .dts file.
SPI is disabled by default.

Signed-off-by: Noralf Tronnes <notro@tronnes.org>

BCM2708: don't register SPI controller when using DT

The device for the SPI controller is in the Device Tree.
Only register the device when not using DT.

Signed-off-by: Noralf Tronnes <notro@tronnes.org>

spi: bcm2835: make driver available on ARCH_BCM2708

Make this driver available on ARCH_BCM2708

Signed-off-by: Noralf Tronnes <notro@tronnes.org>

bcm2708: Remove the prohibition on mixing SPIDEV and DT
2015-04-13 21:44:26 +01:00
notro
bb2aae3fd2 BCM2708: use pinctrl-bcm2835
Use pinctrl-bcm2835 instead of the pinctrl-bcm2708 and bcm2708_gpio
combination.

Signed-off-by: Noralf Tronnes <notro@tronnes.org>
2015-04-13 21:44:25 +01:00
popcornmix
728bd646ac BCM2708: armctrl: Add IRQ Device Tree support
Add Device Tree IRQ support for BCM2708.
Usage is the same as for irq-bcm2835.
See binding document: brcm,bcm2835-armctrl-ic.txt

A bank 3 is added to handle GPIO interrupts. This is done because
armctrl also handles GPIO interrupts.

Signed-off-by: Noralf Tronnes <notro@tronnes.org>

BCM2708: armctrl: remove irq bank 3

irq bank 3 was needed by the pinctrl-bcm2708 and bcm2708_gpio
combination. It is no longer required.

Signed-off-by: Noralf Tronnes <notro@tronnes.org>
2015-04-13 21:44:24 +01:00
popcornmix
3877d39d62 vmstat: Workaround for issue where dirty page count goes negative
See:
https://github.com/raspberrypi/linux/issues/617
http://www.spinics.net/lists/linux-mm/msg72236.html
2015-04-13 21:44:24 +01:00
Howard Mitchell
b9739050a1 Set a limit of 0dB on Digital Volume Control
The main volume control in the PCM512x DAC has a range up to
+24dB. This is dangerously loud and can potentially cause massive
clipping in the output stages. Therefore this sets a sensible
limit of 0dB for this control.
2015-04-13 21:44:23 +01:00
Gordon Garrity
d1225854e0 Add IQaudIO Sound Card support for Raspberry Pi 2015-04-13 21:44:22 +01:00
Daniel Matuschek
54547dfbbf ASoC: wm8804: Set idle_bias_off to false Idle bias has been change to remove warning on driver startup
Signed-off-by: Daniel Matuschek <daniel@matuschek.net>
2015-04-13 21:44:21 +01:00
Daniel Matuschek
d94c523ac9 BCM2708: Added support for HiFiBerry Digi board Board initalization by I2C
Signed-off-by: Daniel Matuschek <daniel@matuschek.net>
2015-04-13 21:44:20 +01:00
Daniel Matuschek
39cdfe0f2e ASoC: BCM:Add support for HiFiBerry Digi. Driver is based on the patched WM8804 driver.
Signed-off-by: Daniel Matuschek <daniel@matuschek.net>
2015-04-13 21:44:19 +01:00
Daniel Matuschek
ef16a69508 ASoC: wm8804: Implement MCLK configuration options, add 32bit support WM8804 can run with PLL frequencies of 256xfs and 128xfs for most sample rates. At 192kHz only 128xfs is supported. The existing driver selects 128xfs automatically for some lower samples rates. By using an additional mclk_div divider, it is now possible to control the behaviour. This allows using 256xfs PLL frequency on all sample rates up to 96kHz. It should allow lower jitter and better signal quality. The behavior has to be controlled by the sound card driver, because some sample frequency share the same setting. e.g. 192kHz and 96kHz use 24.576MHz master clock. The only difference is the MCLK divider.
This also added support for 32bit data.

Signed-off-by: Daniel Matuschek <daniel@matuschek.net>
2015-04-13 21:44:18 +01:00
Florian Meier
4408491bc5 ASoC: BCM2708: Add support for RPi-DAC
This adds a machine driver for the RPi-DAC.

Signed-off-by: Florian Meier <florian.meier@koalo.de>
2015-04-13 21:44:17 +01:00
Florian Meier
cc828a001f BCM2708: Add HifiBerry DAC to board file
This adds the initalization of the HifiBerry DAC
to the mach-bcm2708 board file.

Signed-off-by: Florian Meier <florian.meier@koalo.de>
2015-04-13 21:44:17 +01:00
Florian Meier
f86e91e68c ASoC: Add support for HifiBerry DAC
This adds a machine driver for the HifiBerry DAC.
It is a sound card that can
be stacked onto the Raspberry Pi.

Signed-off-by: Florian Meier <florian.meier@koalo.de>
2015-04-13 21:44:16 +01:00
Florian Meier
0d6feb71ce BCM2708: Add I2S support to board file
Adds the required initializations for I2S
to the board file of mach-bcm2708.

Signed-off-by: Florian Meier <florian.meier@koalo.de>
2015-04-13 21:44:15 +01:00
Florian Meier
cf8be27cba ASoC: Add support for PCM5102A codec
Some definitions to support the PCM5102A codec
by Texas Instruments.

Signed-off-by: Florian Meier <florian.meier@koalo.de>
2015-04-13 21:44:14 +01:00
Florian Meier
f391e968d1 ASoC: Add support for BCM2708
This driver adds support for digital audio (I2S)
for the BCM2708 SoC that is used by the
Raspberry Pi. External audio codecs can be
connected to the Raspberry Pi via P5 header.

It relies on cyclic DMA engine support for BCM2708.

Signed-off-by: Florian Meier <florian.meier@koalo.de>

ASoC: BCM2708: Add 24 bit support

This adds 24 bit support to the I2S driver of the BCM2708.
Besides enabling the 24 bit flags, it includes two bug fixes:

MMAP is not supported. Claiming this leads to strange issues
when the format of driver and file do not match.

The datasheet states that the width extension bit should be set
for widths greater than 24, but greater or equal would be correct.
This follows from the definition of the width field.

Signed-off-by: Florian Meier <florian.meier@koalo.de>

bcm2708-i2s: Update bclk_ratio to more correct values

Move GPIO setup to hw_params.

This is used to stop the I2S driver from breaking
the GPIO setup for other uses of the PCM interface

Configure GPIOs for I2S based on revision/card settings

With RPi model B+, assignment of the I2S GPIO pins has changed.
This patch uses the board revision to auto-detect the GPIOs used
for I2S. It also allows sound card drivers to set the GPIOs that
should be used. This is especially important with the Compute
Module.

bcm2708-i2s: Avoid leak from iomap when accessing gpio

bcm2708: Eliminate i2s debugfs directory error

Qualify the two regmap ranges uses by bcm2708-i2s ('-i2s' and '-clk')
to avoid the name clash when registering debugfs entries.
2015-04-13 21:44:13 +01:00
popcornmix
5794df681e config: Enable CONFIG_MEMCG, but leave it disabled (due to memory cost). Enable with cgroup_enable=memory. 2015-04-13 21:44:12 +01:00
popcornmix
03fc11f129 Added Device IDs for August DVB-T 205 2015-04-13 21:44:11 +01:00
popcornmix
dcbc082816 enabling the realtime clock 1-wire chip DS1307 and 1-wire on GPIO4 (as a module)
1-wire: Add support for configuring pin for w1-gpio kernel module
See: https://github.com/raspberrypi/linux/pull/457

Add bitbanging pullups, use them for w1-gpio

Allows parasite power to work, uses module option pullup=1

bcm2708: Ensure 1-wire pullup is disabled by default, and expose as module parameter

Signed-off-by: Alex J Lennon <ajlennon@dynamicdevices.co.uk>

w1-gpio: Add gpiopin module parameter and correctly free up gpio pull-up pin, if set

Signed-off-by: Alex J Lennon <ajlennon@dynamicdevices.co.uk>
2015-04-13 21:44:10 +01:00
popcornmix
2be1bf502f Allow mac address to be set in smsc95xx
Signed-off-by: popcornmix <popcornmix@gmail.com>
2015-04-13 21:44:09 +01:00
Harm Hanemaaijer
2ac8103262 Speed up console framebuffer imageblit function
Especially on platforms with a slower CPU but a relatively high
framebuffer fill bandwidth, like current ARM devices, the existing
console monochrome imageblit function used to draw console text is
suboptimal for common pixel depths such as 16bpp and 32bpp. The existing
code is quite general and can deal with several pixel depths. By creating
special case functions for 16bpp and 32bpp, by far the most common pixel
formats used on modern systems, a significant speed-up is attained
which can be readily felt on ARM-based devices like the Raspberry Pi
and the Allwinner platform, but should help any platform using the
fb layer.

The special case functions allow constant folding, eliminating a number
of instructions including divide operations, and allow the use of an
unrolled loop, eliminating instructions with a variable shift size,
reducing source memory access instructions, and eliminating excessive
branching. These unrolled loops also allow much better code optimization
by the C compiler. The code that selects which optimized variant is used
is also simplified, eliminating integer divide instructions.

The speed-up, measured by timing 'cat file.txt' in the console, varies
between 40% and 70%, when testing on the Raspberry Pi and Allwinner
ARM-based platforms, depending on font size and the pixel depth, with
the greater benefit for 32bpp.

Signed-off-by: Harm Hanemaaijer <fgenfb@yahoo.com>
2015-04-13 21:44:08 +01:00
popcornmix
e086dc76a8 rtl8192cu: Add PID for D-Link DWA 131 2015-04-13 21:44:07 +01:00
popcornmix
8deb76e702 Add non-mainline source for rtl8192cu wireless driver version v4.0.2_9000 as this is widely used. Disabled older rtlwifi driver 2015-04-13 21:44:06 +01:00
Siarhei Siamashka
9cbd4100fe fbdev: add FBIOCOPYAREA ioctl
Based on the patch authored by Ali Gholami Rudi at
    https://lkml.org/lkml/2009/7/13/153

Provide an ioctl for userspace applications, but only if this operation
is hardware accelerated (otherwide it does not make any sense).

Signed-off-by: Siarhei Siamashka <siarhei.siamashka@gmail.com>
2015-04-13 21:44:05 +01:00
notro
7bd68055e0 BCM2708: Add core Device Tree support
Add the bare minimum needed to boot BCM2708 from a Device Tree.

Signed-off-by: Noralf Tronnes <notro@tronnes.org>

BCM2708: DT: change 'axi' nodename to 'soc'

Change DT node named 'axi' to 'soc' so it matches ARCH_BCM2835.
The VC4 bootloader fills in certain properties in the 'axi' subtree,
but since this is part of an upstreaming effort, the name is changed.

Signed-off-by: Noralf Tronnes notro@tronnes.org

BCM2708_DT: Correct length of the peripheral space
2015-04-13 21:44:04 +01:00
notro
10aeca07dc BCM2708: Migrate to the Common Clock Framework
As part of moving towards using Device Tree, the Common Clock Framework
has to be used instead of the BCM2708 clock implementation.

Selecting COMMON_CLK removes the need to set CLKDEV_LOOKUP and HAVE_CLK explicitly.

CONFIG_ARCH_BCM2708_CHIPIT #ifdef's are removed. They are no longer in use.

Signed-off-by: Noralf Tronnes <notro@tronnes.org>
2015-04-13 21:44:03 +01:00
notro
771519a53f spi-bcm2708: Prepare for Common Clock Framework migration
As part of migrating to use the Common Clock Framework, replace clk_enable()
with clk_prepare_enable() and clk_disable() with clk_disable_unprepare().
This does not affect behaviour under the current clock implementation.

Also add a missing clk_disable_unprepare() in the probe error path.

Signed-off-by: Noralf Tronnes <notro@tronnes.org>
2015-04-13 21:44:02 +01:00
Vincent Sanders
522aafec7c bcm2835: add v4l2 camera device
- Supports raw YUV capture, preview, JPEG and H264.
- Uses videobuf2 for data transfer, using dma_buf.
- Uses 3.6.10 timestamping
- Camera power based on use
- Uses immutable input mode on video encoder

Signed-off-by: Daniel Stone <daniels@collabora.com>
Signed-off-by: Luke Diamand <luked@broadcom.com>

V4L2: Fixes from 6by9

V4L2: Fix EV values. Add manual shutter speed control

V4L2 EV values should be in units of 1/1000. Corrected.
Add support for V4L2_CID_EXPOSURE_ABSOLUTE which should
give manual shutter control. Requires manual exposure mode
to be selected first.

Signed-off-by: Dave Stevenson <dsteve@broadcom.com>

V4L2: Correct JPEG Q-factor range

Should be 1-100, not 0-100

Signed-off-by: Dave Stevenson <dsteve@broadcom.com>

V4L2: Fix issue of driver jamming if STREAMON failed.

Fix issue where the driver was left in a partially enabled
state if STREAMON failed, and would then reject many IOCTLs
as it thought it was streaming.

Signed-off-by: Dave Stevenson <dsteve@broadcom.com>

V4L2: Fix ISO controls.

Driver was passing the index to the GPU, and not the desired
ISO value.

Signed-off-by: Dave Stevenson <dsteve@broadcom.com>

V4L2: Add flicker avoidance controls

Add support for V4L2_CID_POWER_LINE_FREQUENCY to set flicker
avoidance frequencies.

Signed-off-by: Dave Stevenson <dsteve@broadcom.com>

V4L2: Add support for frame rate control.

Add support for frame rate (or time per frame as V4L2
inverts it) control via s_parm.

Signed-off-by: Dave Stevenson <dsteve@broadcom.com>

V4L2: Improve G_FBUF handling so we pass conformance

Return some sane numbers for get framebuffer so that
we pass conformance.

Signed-off-by: Dave Stevenson <dsteve@broadcom.com>

V4L2: Fix information advertised through g_vidfmt

Width and height were being stored based on incorrect
values.

Signed-off-by: Dave Stevenson <dsteve@broadcom.com>

V4L2: Add support for inline H264 headers

Add support for V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_REPEAT_SEQ_HEADER
to control H264 inline headers.
Requires firmware fix to work correctly, otherwise format
has to be set to H264 before this parameter is set.

Signed-off-by: Dave Stevenson <dsteve@broadcom.com>

V4L2: Fix JPEG timestamp issue

JPEG images were coming through from the GPU with timestamp
of 0. Detect this and give current system time instead
of some invalid value.

Signed-off-by: Dave Stevenson <dsteve@broadcom.com>

V4L2: Fix issue when switching down JPEG resolution.

JPEG buffer size calculation is based on input resolution.
Input resolution was being configured after output port
format. Caused failures if switching from one JPEG resolution
to a smaller one.

Signed-off-by: Dave Stevenson <dsteve@broadcom.com>

V4L2: Enable MJPEG encoding

Requires GPU firmware update to support MJPEG encoder.

Signed-off-by: Dave Stevenson <dsteve@broadcom.com>

V4L2: Correct flag settings for compressed formats

Set flags field correctly on enum_fmt_vid_cap for compressed
image formats.

Signed-off-by: Dave Stevenson <dsteve@broadcom.com>

V4L2: H264 profile & level ctrls, FPS control and auto exp pri

Several control handling updates.
H264 profile and level controls.
Timeperframe/FPS reworked to add V4L2_CID_EXPOSURE_AUTO_PRIORITY to
select whether AE is allowed to override the framerate specified.

Signed-off-by: Dave Stevenson <dsteve@broadcom.com>

V4L2: Correct BGR24 to RGB24 in format table

Signed-off-by: Dave Stevenson <dsteve@broadcom.com>

V4L2: Add additional pixel formats. Correct colourspace

Adds the other flavours of YUYV, and NV12.
Corrects the overlay advertised colourspace.

Signed-off-by: Dave Stevenson <dsteve@broadcom.com>

V4L2: Drop logging msg from info to debug

Signed-off-by: Dave Stevenson <dsteve@broadcom.com>

V4L2: Initial pass at scene modes.

Only supports exposure mode and metering modes.

Signed-off-by: Dave Stevenson <dsteve@broadcom.com>

V4L2: Add manual white balance control.

Adds support for V4L2_CID_RED_BALANCE and
V4L2_CID_BLUE_BALANCE. Only has an effect if
V4L2_CID_AUTO_N_PRESET_WHITE_BALANCE has
V4L2_WHITE_BALANCE_MANUAL selected.

Signed-off-by: Dave Stevenson <dsteve@broadcom.com>

config: Enable V4L / MMAL driver

V4L2: Increase the MMAL timeout to 3sec

MJPEG codec flush is now taking longer and results
in a kernel panic if the driver has stopped waiting for
the result when it finally completes.
Increase the timeout value from 1 to 3secs.

Signed-off-by: Dave Stevenson <dsteve@broadcom.com>

V4L2: Add support for setting H264_I_PERIOD

Adds support for the parameter V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_I_PERIOD
to set the frequency with which I frames are produced.

Signed-off-by: Dave Stevenson <dsteve@broadcom.com>

V4L2: Enable GPU function for removing padding from images.

GPU can now support arbitrary strides, although may require
additional processing to achieve it. Enable this feature
so that the images delivered are the size requested.

Signed-off-by: Dave Stevenson <dsteve@broadcom.com>

V4L2: Add support for V4L2_PIX_FMT_BGR32

Signed-off-by: Dave Stevenson <dsteve@broadcom.com>

V4L2: Set the colourspace to avoid odd YUV-RGB conversions

Removes the amiguity from the conversion routines and stops
them dropping back to the SD vs HD choice of coeffs.

Signed-off-by: Dave Stevenson <dsteve@broadcom.com>

V4L2: Make video/still threshold a run-time param

Move the define for at what resolution the driver
switches from a video mode capture to a stills mode
capture to module parameters.

Signed-off-by: Dave Stevenson <dsteve@broadcom.com>

V4L2: Fix incorrect pool sizing

Signed-off-by: Dave Stevenson <dsteve@broadcom.com>

V4L2: Add option to disable enum_framesizes.

Gstreamer's handling of a driver that advertises
V4L2_FRMSIZE_TYPE_STEPWISE to define the supported
resolutions is broken. See bug
https://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=726521

Optional parameter of gst_v4l2src_is_broken added.
If non-zero, the driver claims not to support that
ioctl, and gstreamer should be happy again (it
guesses a set of defaults for itself).

Signed-off-by: Dave Stevenson <dsteve@broadcom.com>

V4L2: Add support for more image formats

Adds YVU420 (YV12), YVU420SP (NV21), and BGR888.

Signed-off-by: Dave Stevenson <dsteve@broadcom.com>

V4L2: Extend range for V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_I_PERIOD

Request to extend the range from the fairly arbitrary
1000 frames (33 seconds at 30fps). Extend out to the
max range supported (int32 value).
Also allow 0, which is handled by the codec as only
send an I-frame on the first frame and never again.
There may be an exception if it detects a significant
scene change, but there's no easy way around that.

Signed-off-by: Dave Stevenson <dsteve@broadcom.com>

bcm2835-camera: stop_streaming now has a void return

BCM2835-V4L2: Fix compliance test failures

VIDIOC_TRY_FMT and VIDIOC_S_FMT tests were faling due
to reporting V4L2_COLORSPACE_JPEG when the colour
format wasn't V4L2_PIX_FMT_JPEG.
Now reports V4L2_COLORSPACE_SMPTE170M for YUV formats.
2015-04-13 21:44:01 +01:00
popcornmix
ec9ce45260 Add Chris Boot's i2c and spi drivers.
i2c-bcm2708: fixed baudrate

Fixed issue where the wrong CDIV value was set for baudrates below 3815 Hz (for 250MHz bus clock).
In that case the computed CDIV value was more than 0xffff. However the CDIV register width is only 16 bits.
This resulted in incorrect setting of CDIV and higher baudrate than intended.
Example: 3500Hz -> CDIV=0x11704 -> CDIV(16bit)=0x1704 -> 42430Hz
After correction: 3500Hz -> CDIV=0x11704 -> CDIV(16bit)=0xffff -> 3815Hz
The correct baudrate is shown in the log after the cdiv > 0xffff correction.

Perform I2C combined transactions when possible

Perform I2C combined transactions whenever possible, within the
restrictions of the Broadcomm Serial Controller.

Disable DONE interrupt during TA poll

Prevent interrupt from being triggered if poll is missed and transfer
starts and finishes.

i2c: Make combined transactions optional and disabled by default
2015-04-13 21:44:00 +01:00
popcornmix
648721778a Added hwmon/thermal driver for reporting core temperature. Thanks Dorian 2015-04-13 21:43:59 +01:00
popcornmix
ec19601d77 Add cpufreq driver 2015-04-13 21:43:59 +01:00
Aron Szabo
7ef8a3ac4c lirc: added support for RaspberryPi GPIO
lirc_rpi: Use read_current_timer to determine transmitter delay. Thanks to jjmz and others
See: https://github.com/raspberrypi/linux/issues/525

lirc: Remove restriction on gpio pins that can be used with lirc

Compute Module, for example could use different pins

lirc_rpi: Add parameter to specify input pin pull

Depending on the connected IR circuitry it might be desirable to change the
gpios internal pull from it pull-down default behaviour. Add a module
parameter to allow the user to set it explicitly.

Signed-off-by: Julian Scheel <julian@jusst.de>

lirc-rpi: Use the higher-level irq control functions

This module used to access the irq_chip methods of the
gpio controller directly, rather than going through the
standard enable_irq/irq_set_irq_type functions. This
caused problems on pinctrl-bcm2835 which only implements
the irq_enable/disable methods and not irq_unmask/mask.

lirc-rpi: Correct the interrupt usage

1) Correct the use of enable_irq (i.e. don't call it so often)
2) Correct the shutdown sequence.
3) Avoid a bcm2708_gpio driver quirk by setting the irq flags earlier

lirc-rpi: use getnstimeofday instead of read_current_timer

read_current_timer isn't guaranteed to return values in
microseconds, and indeed it doesn't on a Pi2.

Issue: linux#827
2015-04-13 21:43:58 +01:00
popcornmix
714c6cc178 Add hwrng (hardware random number generator) driver 2015-04-13 21:43:57 +01:00
Tim Gover
cb14294af0 vcsm: VideoCore shared memory service for BCM2835
Add experimental support for the VideoCore shared memory service.
This allows user processes to allocate memory from VideoCore's
GPU relocatable heap and mmap the buffers. Additionally, the memory
handles can passed to other VideoCore services such as MMAL, OpenMax
and DispmanX

TODO
* This driver was originally released for BCM28155 which has a different
  cache architecture to BCM2835. Consequently, in this release only
  uncached mappings are supported. However, there's no fundamental
  reason which cached mappings cannot be support or BCM2835
* More refactoring is required to remove the typedefs.
* Re-enable the some of the commented out debug-fs statistics which were
  disabled when migrating code from proc-fs.
* There's a lot of code to support sharing of VCSM in order to support
  Android. This could probably done more cleanly or perhaps just
  removed.

Signed-off-by: Tim Gover <timgover@gmail.com>

config: Disable VC_SM for now to fix hang with cutdown kernel
2015-04-13 21:43:56 +01:00
popcornmix
c34339791f bcm2708 vchiq driver
Signed-off-by: popcornmix <popcornmix@gmail.com>

vchiq: create_pagelist copes with vmalloc memory

Signed-off-by: Daniel Stone <daniels@collabora.com>

vchiq: fix the shim message release

Signed-off-by: Daniel Stone <daniels@collabora.com>

vchiq: export additional symbols

Signed-off-by: Daniel Stone <daniels@collabora.com>

VCHIQ: Make service closure fully synchronous (drv)

This is one half of a two-part patch, the other half of which is to
the vchiq_lib user library. With these patches, calls to
vchiq_close_service and vchiq_remove_service won't return until any
associated callbacks have been delivered to the callback thread.

VCHIQ: Add per-service tracing

The new service option VCHIQ_SERVICE_OPTION_TRACE is a boolean that
toggles tracing for the specified service.

This commit also introduces vchi_service_set_option and the associated
option VCHI_SERVICE_OPTION_TRACE.

vchiq: Make the synchronous-CLOSE logic more tolerant

vchiq: Move logging control into debugfs

vchiq: Take care of a corner case tickled by VCSM

Closing a connection that isn't fully open requires care, since one
side does not know the other side's port number. Code was present to
handle the case where a CLOSE is sent immediately after an OPEN, i.e.
before the OPENACK has been received, but this was incorrectly being
used when an OPEN from a client using port 0 was rejected.

(In the observed failure, the host was attempting to use the VCSM
service, which isn't present in the 'cutdown' firmware. The failure
was intermittent because sometimes the keepalive service would
grab port 0.)

This case can be distinguished because the client's remoteport will
still be VCHIQ_PORT_FREE, and the srvstate will be OPENING. Either
condition is sufficient to differentiate it from the special case
described above.

vchiq: Avoid high load when blocked and unkillable

vchiq: Include SIGSTOP and SIGCONT in list of signals not-masked by vchiq to allow gdb to work

vchiq_arm: Complete support for SYNCHRONOUS mode

vchiq: Remove inline from suspend/resume
2015-04-13 21:43:55 +01:00
popcornmix
343302126f bcm2708: alsa sound driver
Signed-off-by: popcornmix <popcornmix@gmail.com>

alsa: add mmap support and some cleanups to bcm2835 ALSA driver

snd-bcm2835: Add support for spdif/hdmi passthrough

This adds a dedicated subdevice which can be used for passthrough of non-audio
formats (ie encoded a52) through the hdmi audio link. In addition to this
driver extension an appropriate card config is required to make alsa-lib
support the AES parameters for this device.

snd-bcm2708: Add mutex, improve logging

Fix for ALSA driver crash

Avoids an issue when closing and opening vchiq where a message can arrive before service handle has been written

alsa: reduce severity of expected warning message

snd-bcm2708: Fix dmesg spam for non-error case
2015-04-13 21:43:54 +01:00
popcornmix
7cbdd6126c cma: Add vc_cma driver to enable use of CMA
Signed-off-by: popcornmix <popcornmix@gmail.com>

vc_cma: Make the vc_cma area the default contiguous DMA area
2015-04-13 21:43:53 +01:00
gellert
379046d034 MMC: added alternative MMC driver
mmc: Disable CMD23 transfers on all cards

Pending wire-level investigation of these types of transfers
and associated errors on bcm2835-mmc, disable for now. Fallback of
CMD18/CMD25 transfers will be used automatically by the MMC layer.

Reported/Tested-by: Gellert Weisz <gellert@raspberrypi.org>

mmc: bcm2835-mmc: enable DT support for all architectures

Both ARCH_BCM2835 and ARCH_BCM270x are built with OF now.
Enable Device Tree support for all architectures.

Signed-off-by: Noralf Trønnes <noralf@tronnes.org>

mmc: bcm2835-mmc: fix probe error handling

Probe error handling is broken in several places.
Simplify error handling by using device managed functions.
Replace pr_{err,info} with dev_{err,info}.

Signed-off-by: Noralf Trønnes <noralf@tronnes.org>
2015-04-13 21:43:52 +01:00
Florian Meier
0e454e2653 dmaengine: Add support for BCM2708
Add support for DMA controller of BCM2708 as used in the Raspberry Pi.
Currently it only supports cyclic DMA.

Signed-off-by: Florian Meier <florian.meier@koalo.de>

dmaengine: expand functionality by supporting scatter/gather transfers sdhci-bcm2708 and dma.c: fix for LITE channels

DMA: fix cyclic LITE length overflow bug

dmaengine: bcm2708: Remove chancnt affectations

Mirror bcm2835-dma.c commit 9eba5536a7:
chancnt is already filled by dma_async_device_register, which uses the channel
list to know how much channels there is.

Since it's already filled, we can safely remove it from the drivers' probe
function.

Signed-off-by: Noralf Trønnes <noralf@tronnes.org>

dmaengine: bcm2708: overwrite dreq only if it is not set

dreq is set when the DMA channel is fetched from Device Tree.
slave_id is set using dmaengine_slave_config().
Only overwrite dreq with slave_id if it is not set.

dreq/slave_id in the cyclic DMA case is not touched, because I don't
have hardware to test with.

Signed-off-by: Noralf Trønnes <noralf@tronnes.org>

dmaengine: bcm2708: do device registration in the board file

Don't register the device in the driver. Do it in the board file.

Signed-off-by: Noralf Trønnes <noralf@tronnes.org>

dmaengine: bcm2708: don't restrict DT support to ARCH_BCM2835

Both ARCH_BCM2835 and ARCH_BCM270x are built with OF now.
Add Device Tree support to the non ARCH_BCM2835 case.
Use the same driver name regardless of architecture.

Signed-off-by: Noralf Trønnes <noralf@tronnes.org>
2015-04-13 21:43:51 +01:00
popcornmix
542c74f1b3 bcm2708 framebuffer driver
Signed-off-by: popcornmix <popcornmix@gmail.com>

bcm2708_fb : Implement blanking support using the mailbox property interface

bcm2708_fb: Add pan and vsync controls

bcm2708_fb: DMA acceleration for fb_copyarea

Based on http://www.raspberrypi.org/phpBB3/viewtopic.php?p=62425#p62425
Also used Simon's dmaer_master module as a reference for tweaking DMA
settings for better performance.

For now busylooping only. IRQ support might be added later.
With non-overclocked Raspberry Pi, the performance is ~360 MB/s
for simple copy or ~260 MB/s for two-pass copy (used when dragging
windows to the right).

In the case of using DMA channel 0, the performance improves
to ~440 MB/s.

For comparison, VFP optimized CPU copy can only do ~114 MB/s in
the same conditions (hindered by reading uncached source buffer).

Signed-off-by: Siarhei Siamashka <siarhei.siamashka@gmail.com>

bcm2708_fb: report number of dma copies

Add a counter (exported via debugfs) reporting the
number of dma copies that the framebuffer driver
has done, in order to help evaluate different
optimization strategies.

Signed-off-by: Luke Diamand <luked@broadcom.com>

bcm2708_fb: use IRQ for DMA copies

The copyarea ioctl() uses DMA to speed things along. This
was busy-waiting for completion. This change supports using
an interrupt instead for larger transfers. For small
transfers, busy-waiting is still likely to be faster.

Signed-off-by: Luke Diamand <luke@diamand.org>

bcm2708: Make ioctl logging quieter
2015-04-13 21:43:50 +01:00
popcornmix
01befd507f bcm2708 watchdog driver
Signed-off-by: popcornmix <popcornmix@gmail.com>
2015-04-13 21:43:49 +01:00
popcornmix
883886d9ba Add dwc_otg driver
Signed-off-by: popcornmix <popcornmix@gmail.com>

usb: dwc: fix lockdep false positive

Signed-off-by: Kari Suvanto <karis79@gmail.com>

usb: dwc: fix inconsistent lock state

Signed-off-by: Kari Suvanto <karis79@gmail.com>

Add FIQ patch to dwc_otg driver. Enable with dwc_otg.fiq_fix_enable=1. Should give about 10% more ARM performance.
Thanks to Gordon and Costas

Avoid dynamic memory allocation for channel lock in USB driver. Thanks ddv2005.

Add NAK holdoff scheme. Enabled by default, disable with dwc_otg.nak_holdoff_enable=0. Thanks gsh

Make sure we wait for the reset to finish

dwc_otg: fix bug in dwc_otg_hcd.c resulting in silent kernel
	 memory corruption, escalating to OOPS under high USB load.

dwc_otg: Fix unsafe access of QTD during URB enqueue

In dwc_otg_hcd_urb_enqueue during qtd creation, it was possible that the
transaction could complete almost immediately after the qtd was assigned
to a host channel during URB enqueue, which meant the qtd pointer was no
longer valid having been completed and removed. Usually, this resulted in
an OOPS during URB submission. By predetermining whether transactions
need to be queued or not, this unsafe pointer access is avoided.

This bug was only evident on the Pi model A where a device was attached
that had no periodic endpoints (e.g. USB pendrive or some wlan devices).

dwc_otg: Fix incorrect URB allocation error handling

If the memory allocation for a dwc_otg_urb failed, the kernel would OOPS
because for some reason a member of the *unallocated* struct was set to
zero. Error handling changed to fail correctly.

dwc_otg: fix potential use-after-free case in interrupt handler

If a transaction had previously aborted, certain interrupts are
enabled to track error counts and reset where necessary. On IN
endpoints the host generates an ACK interrupt near-simultaneously
with completion of transfer. In the case where this transfer had
previously had an error, this results in a use-after-free on
the QTD memory space with a 1-byte length being overwritten to
0x00.

dwc_otg: add handling of SPLIT transaction data toggle errors

Previously a data toggle error on packets from a USB1.1 device behind
a TT would result in the Pi locking up as the driver never handled
the associated interrupt. Patch adds basic retry mechanism and
interrupt acknowledgement to cater for either a chance toggle error or
for devices that have a broken initial toggle state (FT8U232/FT232BM).

dwc_otg: implement tasklet for returning URBs to usbcore hcd layer

The dwc_otg driver interrupt handler for transfer completion will spend
a very long time with interrupts disabled when a URB is completed -
this is because usb_hcd_giveback_urb is called from within the handler
which for a USB device driver with complicated processing (e.g. webcam)
will take an exorbitant amount of time to complete. This results in
missed completion interrupts for other USB packets which lead to them
being dropped due to microframe overruns.

This patch splits returning the URB to the usb hcd layer into a
high-priority tasklet. This will have most benefit for isochronous IN
transfers but will also have incidental benefit where multiple periodic
devices are active at once.

dwc_otg: fix NAK holdoff and allow on split transactions only

This corrects a bug where if a single active non-periodic endpoint
had at least one transaction in its qh, on frnum == MAX_FRNUM the qh
would get skipped and never get queued again. This would result in
a silent device until error detection (automatic or otherwise) would
either reset the device or flush and requeue the URBs.

Additionally the NAK holdoff was enabled for all transactions - this
would potentially stall a HS endpoint for 1ms if a previous error state
enabled this interrupt and the next response was a NAK. Fix so that
only split transactions get held off.

dwc_otg: Call usb_hcd_unlink_urb_from_ep with lock held in completion handler

usb_hcd_unlink_urb_from_ep must be called with the HCD lock held.  Calling it
asynchronously in the tasklet was not safe (regression in
c4564d4a1a).

This change unlinks it from the endpoint prior to queueing it for handling in
the tasklet, and also adds a check to ensure the urb is OK to be unlinked
before doing so.

NULL pointer dereference kernel oopses had been observed in usb_hcd_giveback_urb
when a USB device was unplugged/replugged during data transfer.  This effect
was reproduced using automated USB port power control, hundreds of replug
events were performed during active transfers to confirm that the problem was
eliminated.

USB fix using a FIQ to implement split transactions

This commit adds a FIQ implementaion that schedules
the split transactions using a FIQ so we don't get
held off by the interrupt latency of Linux

dwc_otg: fix device attributes and avoid kernel warnings on boot

dcw_otg: avoid logging function that can cause panics

See: https://github.com/raspberrypi/firmware/issues/21
Thanks to cleverca22 for fix

dwc_otg: mask correct interrupts after transaction error recovery

The dwc_otg driver will unmask certain interrupts on a transaction
that previously halted in the error state in order to reset the
QTD error count. The various fine-grained interrupt handlers do not
consider that other interrupts besides themselves were unmasked.

By disabling the two other interrupts only ever enabled in DMA mode
for this purpose, we can avoid unnecessary function calls in the
IRQ handler. This will also prevent an unneccesary FIQ interrupt
from being generated if the FIQ is enabled.

dwc_otg: fiq: prevent FIQ thrash and incorrect state passing to IRQ

In the case of a transaction to a device that had previously aborted
due to an error, several interrupts are enabled to reset the error
count when a device responds. This has the side-effect of making the
FIQ thrash because the hardware will generate multiple instances of
a NAK on an IN bulk/interrupt endpoint and multiple instances of ACK
on an OUT bulk/interrupt endpoint. Make the FIQ mask and clear the
associated interrupts.

Additionally, on non-split transactions make sure that only unmasked
interrupts are cleared. This caused a hard-to-trigger but serious
race condition when you had the combination of an endpoint awaiting
error recovery and a transaction completed on an endpoint - due to
the sequencing and timing of interrupts generated by the dwc_otg core,
it was possible to confuse the IRQ handler.

Fix function tracing

dwc_otg: whitespace cleanup in dwc_otg_urb_enqueue

dwc_otg: prevent OOPSes during device disconnects

The dwc_otg_urb_enqueue function is thread-unsafe. In particular the
access of urb->hcpriv, usb_hcd_link_urb_to_ep, dwc_otg_urb->qtd and
friends does not occur within a critical section and so if a device
was unplugged during activity there was a high chance that the
usbcore hub_thread would try to disable the endpoint with partially-
formed entries in the URB queue. This would result in BUG() or null
pointer dereferences.

Fix so that access of urb->hcpriv, enqueuing to the hardware and
adding to usbcore endpoint URB lists is contained within a single
critical section.

dwc_otg: prevent BUG() in TT allocation if hub address is > 16

A fixed-size array is used to track TT allocation. This was
previously set to 16 which caused a crash because
dwc_otg_hcd_allocate_port would read past the end of the array.

This was hit if a hub was plugged in which enumerated as addr > 16,
due to previous device resets or unplugs.

Also add #ifdef FIQ_DEBUG around hcd->hub_port_alloc[], which grows
to a large size if 128 hub addresses are supported. This field is
for debug only for tracking which frame an allocate happened in.

dwc_otg: make channel halts with unknown state less damaging

If the IRQ received a channel halt interrupt through the FIQ
with no other bits set, the IRQ would not release the host
channel and never complete the URB.

Add catchall handling to treat as a transaction error and retry.

dwc_otg: fiq_split: use TTs with more granularity

This fixes certain issues with split transaction scheduling.

- Isochronous multi-packet OUT transactions now hog the TT until
  they are completed - this prevents hubs aborting transactions
  if they get a periodic start-split out-of-order
- Don't perform TT allocation on non-periodic endpoints - this
  allows simultaneous use of the TT's bulk/control and periodic
  transaction buffers

This commit will mainly affect USB audio playback.

dwc_otg: fix potential sleep while atomic during urb enqueue

Fixes a regression introduced with eb1b482a. Kmalloc called from
dwc_otg_hcd_qtd_add / dwc_otg_hcd_qtd_create did not always have
the GPF_ATOMIC flag set. Force this flag when inside the larger
critical section.

dwc_otg: make fiq_split_enable imply fiq_fix_enable

Failing to set up the FIQ correctly would result in
"IRQ 32: nobody cared" errors in dmesg.

dwc_otg: prevent crashes on host port disconnects

Fix several issues resulting in crashes or inconsistent state
if a Model A root port was disconnected.

- Clean up queue heads properly in kill_urbs_in_qh_list by
  removing the empty QHs from the schedule lists
- Set the halt status properly to prevent IRQ handlers from
  using freed memory
- Add fiq_split related cleanup for saved registers
- Make microframe scheduling reclaim host channels if
  active during a disconnect
- Abort URBs with -ESHUTDOWN status response, informing
  device drivers so they respond in a more correct fashion
  and don't try to resubmit URBs
- Prevent IRQ handlers from attempting to handle channel
  interrupts if the associated URB was dequeued (and the
  driver state was cleared)

dwc_otg: prevent leaking URBs during enqueue

A dwc_otg_urb would get leaked if the HCD enqueue function
failed for any reason. Free the URB at the appropriate points.

dwc_otg: Enable NAK holdoff for control split transactions

Certain low-speed devices take a very long time to complete a
data or status stage of a control transaction, producing NAK
responses until they complete internal processing - the USB2.0
spec limit is up to 500mS. This causes the same type of interrupt
storm as seen with USB-serial dongles prior to c8edb238.

In certain circumstances, usually while booting, this interrupt
storm could cause SD card timeouts.

dwc_otg: Fix for occasional lockup on boot when doing a USB reset

dwc_otg: Don't issue traffic to LS devices in FS mode

Issuing low-speed packets when the root port is in full-speed mode
causes the root port to stop responding. Explicitly fail when
enqueuing URBs to a LS endpoint on a FS bus.

Fix ARM architecture issue with local_irq_restore()

If local_fiq_enable() is called before a local_irq_restore(flags) where
the flags variable has the F bit set, the FIQ will be erroneously disabled.

Fixup arch_local_irq_restore to avoid trampling the F bit in CPSR.

Also fix some of the hacks previously implemented for previous dwc_otg
incarnations.

dwc_otg: fiq_fsm: Base commit for driver rewrite

This commit removes the previous FIQ fixes entirely and adds fiq_fsm.

This rewrite features much more complete support for split transactions
and takes into account several OTG hardware bugs. High-speed
isochronous transactions are also capable of being performed by fiq_fsm.

All driver options have been removed and replaced with:
  - dwc_otg.fiq_enable (bool)
  - dwc_otg.fiq_fsm_enable (bool)
  - dwc_otg.fiq_fsm_mask (bitmask)
  - dwc_otg.nak_holdoff (unsigned int)

Defaults are specified such that fiq_fsm behaves similarly to the
previously implemented FIQ fixes.

fiq_fsm: Push error recovery into the FIQ when fiq_fsm is used

If the transfer associated with a QTD failed due to a bus error, the HCD
would retry the transfer up to 3 times (implementing the USB2.0
three-strikes retry in software).

Due to the masking mechanism used by fiq_fsm, it is only possible to pass
a single interrupt through to the HCD per-transfer.

In this instance host channels would fall off the radar because the error
reset would function, but the subsequent channel halt would be lost.

Push the error count reset into the FIQ handler.

fiq_fsm: Implement timeout mechanism

For full-speed endpoints with a large packet size, interrupt latency
runs the risk of the FIQ starting a transaction too late in a full-speed
frame. If the device is still transmitting data when EOF2 for the
downstream frame occurs, the hub will disable the port. This change is
not reflected in the hub status endpoint and the device becomes
unresponsive.

Prevent high-bandwidth transactions from being started too late in a
frame. The mechanism is not guaranteed: a combination of bit stuffing
and hub latency may still result in a device overrunning.

fiq_fsm: fix bounce buffer utilisation for Isochronous OUT

Multi-packet isochronous OUT transactions were subject to a few bounday
bugs. Fix them.

Audio playback is now much more robust: however, an issue stands with
devices that have adaptive sinks - ALSA plays samples too fast.

dwc_otg: Return full-speed frame numbers in HS mode

The frame counter increments on every *microframe* in high-speed mode.
Most device drivers expect this number to be in full-speed frames - this
caused considerable confusion to e.g. snd_usb_audio which uses the
frame counter to estimate the number of samples played.

fiq_fsm: save PID on completion of interrupt OUT transfers

Also add edge case handling for interrupt transports.

Note that for periodic split IN, data toggles are unimplemented in the
OTG host hardware - it unconditionally accepts any PID.

fiq_fsm: add missing case for fiq_fsm_tt_in_use()

Certain combinations of bitrate and endpoint activity could
result in a periodic transaction erroneously getting started
while the previous Isochronous OUT was still active.

fiq_fsm: clear hcintmsk for aborted transactions

Prevents the FIQ from erroneously handling interrupts
on a timed out channel.

fiq_fsm: enable by default

fiq_fsm: fix dequeues for non-periodic split transactions

If a dequeue happened between the SSPLIT and CSPLIT phases of the
transaction, the HCD would never receive an interrupt.

fiq_fsm: Disable by default

fiq_fsm: Handle HC babble errors

The HCTSIZ transfer size field raises a babble interrupt if
the counter wraps. Handle the resulting interrupt in this case.

dwc_otg: fix interrupt registration for fiq_enable=0

Additionally make the module parameter conditional for wherever
hcd->fiq_state is touched.

fiq_fsm: Enable by default

dwc_otg: Fix various issues with root port and transaction errors

Process the host port interrupts correctly (and don't trample them).
Root port hotplug now functional again.

Fix a few thinkos with the transaction error passthrough for fiq_fsm.

fiq_fsm: Implement hack for Split Interrupt transactions

Hubs aren't too picky about which endpoint we send Control type split
transactions to. By treating Interrupt transfers as Control, it is
possible to use the non-periodic queue in the OTG core as well as the
non-periodic FIFOs in the hub itself. This massively reduces the
microframe exclusivity/contention that periodic split transactions
otherwise have to enforce.

It goes without saying that this is a fairly egregious USB specification
violation, but it works.

Original idea by Hans Petter Selasky @ FreeBSD.org.

dwc_otg: FIQ support on SMP. Set up FIQ stack and handler on Core 0 only.

dwc_otg: introduce fiq_fsm_spin(un|)lock()

SMP safety for the FIQ relies on register read-modify write cycles being
completed in the correct order. Several places in the DWC code modify
registers also touched by the FIQ. Protect these by a bare-bones lock
mechanism.

This also makes it possible to run the FIQ and IRQ handlers on different
cores.

fiq_fsm: fix build on bcm2708 and bcm2709 platforms

dwc_otg: put some barriers back where they should be for UP

bcm2709/dwc_otg: Setup FIQ on core 1 if >1 core active

dwc_otg: fixup read-modify-write in critical paths

Be more careful about read-modify-write on registers that the FIQ
also touches.

Guard fiq_fsm_spin_lock with fiq_enable check

fiq_fsm: Falling out of the state machine isn't fatal

This edge case can be hit if the port is disabled while the FIQ is
in the middle of a transaction. Make the effects less severe.

Also get rid of the useless return value.
2015-04-13 21:43:48 +01:00
popcornmix
e2712899ce Add bcm2708_gpio driver
Signed-off-by: popcornmix <popcornmix@gmail.com>

bcm2708: Add extension to configure internal pulls

The bcm2708 gpio controller supports internal pulls to be used as pull-up,
pull-down or being entirely disabled. As it can be useful for a driver to
change the pull configuration from it's default pull-down state, add an
extension which allows configuring the pull per gpio.

Signed-off-by: Julian Scheel <julian@jusst.de>

bcm2708-gpio: Revert the use of pinctrl_request_gpio

In non-DT systems, pinctrl_request_gpio always fails causing
"requests probe deferral" messages. In DT systems, it isn't useful
because the reference counting is independent of the normal pinctrl
pin reservations.

gpio: Only clear the currently occurring interrupt. Avoids losing interrupts

See: linux #760

bcm2708_gpio: Avoid calling irq_unmask for all interrupts

When setting up the interrupts, specify that the handle_simple_irq
handler should be used. This leaves interrupt acknowledgement to
the caller, and prevents irq_unmask from being called for all
interrupts.

Issue: linux #760
2015-04-13 21:43:47 +01:00
popcornmix
d42a4a9ebe Add 2709 platform for Raspberry Pi 2 2015-04-13 21:43:47 +01:00
popcornmix
6a451debad Main bcm2708 linux port
Signed-off-by: popcornmix <popcornmix@gmail.com>
2015-04-13 16:52:06 +01:00
25476 changed files with 1020758 additions and 2614204 deletions

View File

@@ -1 +0,0 @@
Christoph Hellwig <hch@lst.de>

7
.gitignore vendored
View File

@@ -24,7 +24,6 @@
*.order
*.elf
*.bin
*.tar
*.gz
*.bz2
*.lzma
@@ -36,7 +35,6 @@
modules.builtin
Module.symvers
*.dwo
*.su
#
# Top-level generic files
@@ -45,7 +43,6 @@ Module.symvers
/TAGS
/linux
/vmlinux
/vmlinux.32
/vmlinux-gdb.py
/vmlinuz
/System.map
@@ -91,9 +88,6 @@ GRTAGS
GSYMS
GTAGS
# id-utils files
ID
*.orig
*~
\#*#
@@ -102,7 +96,6 @@ ID
# Leavings from module signing
#
extra_certificates
signing_key.pem
signing_key.priv
signing_key.x509
x509.genkey

View File

@@ -17,7 +17,6 @@ Aleksey Gorelov <aleksey_gorelov@phoenix.com>
Al Viro <viro@ftp.linux.org.uk>
Al Viro <viro@zenIV.linux.org.uk>
Andreas Herrmann <aherrman@de.ibm.com>
Andrey Ryabinin <ryabinin.a.a@gmail.com> <a.ryabinin@samsung.com>
Andrew Morton <akpm@linux-foundation.org>
Andrew Vasquez <andrew.vasquez@qlogic.com>
Andy Adamson <andros@citi.umich.edu>
@@ -59,7 +58,6 @@ James Bottomley <jejb@mulgrave.(none)>
James Bottomley <jejb@titanic.il.steeleye.com>
James E Wilson <wilson@specifix.com>
James Ketrenos <jketreno@io.(none)>
<javier@osg.samsung.com> <javier.martinez@collabora.co.uk>
Jean Tourrilhes <jt@hpl.hp.com>
Jeff Garzik <jgarzik@pretzel.yyz.us>
Jens Axboe <axboe@suse.de>
@@ -86,7 +84,6 @@ Mayuresh Janorkar <mayur@ti.com>
Michael Buesch <m@bues.ch>
Michel Dänzer <michel@tungstengraphics.com>
Mitesh shah <mshah@teja.com>
Mohit Kumar <mohit.kumar@st.com> <mohit.kumar.dhaka@gmail.com>
Morten Welinder <terra@gnome.org>
Morten Welinder <welinder@anemone.rentec.com>
Morten Welinder <welinder@darter.rentec.com>
@@ -98,14 +95,11 @@ Patrick Mochel <mochel@digitalimplant.org>
Peter A Jonsson <pj@ludd.ltu.se>
Peter Oruba <peter@oruba.de>
Peter Oruba <peter.oruba@amd.com>
Pratyush Anand <pratyush.anand@gmail.com> <pratyush.anand@st.com>
Praveen BP <praveenbp@ti.com>
Rajesh Shah <rajesh.shah@intel.com>
Ralf Baechle <ralf@linux-mips.org>
Ralf Wildenhues <Ralf.Wildenhues@gmx.de>
Randy Dunlap <rdunlap@infradead.org> <rdunlap@xenotime.net>
Rémi Denis-Courmont <rdenis@simphalempin.com>
Ricardo Ribalda Delgado <ricardo.ribalda@gmail.com>
Rudolf Marek <R.Marek@sh.cvut.cz>
Rui Saraiva <rmps@joel.ist.utl.pt>
Sachin P Sant <ssant@in.ibm.com>
@@ -118,7 +112,6 @@ Shiraz Hashim <shiraz.linux.kernel@gmail.com> <shiraz.hashim@st.com>
Simon Kelley <simon@thekelleys.org.uk>
Stéphane Witzmann <stephane.witzmann@ubpmes.univ-bpclermont.fr>
Stephen Hemminger <shemminger@osdl.org>
Sudeep Holla <sudeep.holla@arm.com> Sudeep KarkadaNagesha <sudeep.karkadanagesha@arm.com>
Sumit Semwal <sumit.semwal@ti.com>
Tejun Heo <htejun@gmail.com>
Thomas Graf <tgraf@suug.ch>
@@ -128,9 +121,7 @@ Uwe Kleine-König <ukleinek@informatik.uni-freiburg.de>
Uwe Kleine-König <ukl@pengutronix.de>
Uwe Kleine-König <Uwe.Kleine-Koenig@digi.com>
Valdis Kletnieks <Valdis.Kletnieks@vt.edu>
Viresh Kumar <vireshk@kernel.org> <viresh.kumar@st.com>
Viresh Kumar <vireshk@kernel.org> <viresh.linux@gmail.com>
Viresh Kumar <vireshk@kernel.org> <viresh.kumar2@arm.com>
Viresh Kumar <viresh.linux@gmail.com> <viresh.kumar@st.com>
Takashi YOSHII <takashi.yoshii.zj@renesas.com>
Yusuke Goda <goda.yusuke@renesas.com>
Gustavo Padovan <gustavo@las.ic.unicamp.br>

54
CREDITS
View File

@@ -20,10 +20,6 @@ D: One of assisting postmasters for vger.kernel.org's lists
S: (ask for current address)
S: Finland
N: Thomas Abraham
E: thomas.ab@samsung.com
D: Samsung pin controller driver
N: Dragos Acostachioaie
E: dragos@iname.com
W: http://www.arbornet.org/~dragos
@@ -191,10 +187,6 @@ N: Krishna Balasubramanian
E: balasub@cis.ohio-state.edu
D: Wrote SYS V IPC (part of standard kernel since 0.99.10)
N: Chris Ball
E: chris@printf.net
D: Former maintainer of the MMC/SD/SDIO subsystem.
N: Dario Ballabio
E: ballabio_dario@emc.com
E: dario.ballabio@tiscalinet.it
@@ -512,10 +504,6 @@ E: paul@paulbristow.net
W: http://paulbristow.net/linux/idefloppy.html
D: Maintainer of IDE/ATAPI floppy driver
N: Stefano Brivio
E: stefano.brivio@polimi.it
D: Broadcom B43 driver
N: Dominik Brodowski
E: linux@brodo.de
W: http://www.brodo.de/
@@ -2053,10 +2041,6 @@ D: pirq addr, CS5535 alsa audio driver
S: Gurgaon, India
S: Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia
N: Mohit Kumar
D: ST Microelectronics SPEAr13xx PCI host bridge driver
D: Synopsys Designware PCI host bridge driver
N: Gabor Kuti
M: seasons@falcon.sch.bme.hu
M: seasons@makosteszta.sote.hu
@@ -2744,10 +2728,6 @@ S: C/ Mieses 20, 9-B
S: Valladolid 47009
S: Spain
N: Jens Osterkamp
E: jens@de.ibm.com
D: Maintainer of Spidernet network driver for Cell
N: Gadi Oxman
E: gadio@netvision.net.il
D: Original author and maintainer of IDE/ATAPI floppy/tape drivers
@@ -2992,10 +2972,6 @@ S: 2200 Mission College Blvd
S: Santa Clara, CA 95052
S: USA
N: Anil Ravindranath
E: anil_ravindranath@pmc-sierra.com
D: PMC-Sierra MaxRAID driver
N: Eric S. Raymond
E: esr@thyrsus.com
W: http://www.tuxedo.org/~esr/
@@ -3028,19 +3004,6 @@ W: http://www.qsl.net/dl1bke/
D: Generic Z8530 driver, AX.25 DAMA slave implementation
D: Several AX.25 hacks
N: Ricardo Ribalda Delgado
E: ricardo.ribalda@gmail.com
W: http://ribalda.com
D: PLX USB338x driver
D: PCA9634 driver
D: Option GTM671WFS
D: Fintek F81216A
D: Various kernel hacks
S: Qtechnology A/S
S: Valby Langgade 142
S: 2500 Valby
S: Denmark
N: Francois-Rene Rideau
E: fare@tunes.org
W: http://www.tunes.org/~fare
@@ -3227,15 +3190,15 @@ S: 69 rue Dunois
S: 75013 Paris
S: France
N: Aleksa Sarai
E: cyphar@cyphar.com
W: https://www.cyphar.com/
D: `pids` cgroup subsystem
N: Dipankar Sarma
E: dipankar@in.ibm.com
D: RCU
N: Yoshinori Sato
E: ysato@users.sourceforge.jp
D: uClinux for Renesas H8/300 (H8300)
D: http://uclinux-h8.sourceforge.jp/
N: Hannu Savolainen
E: hannu@opensound.com
D: Maintainer of the sound drivers until 2.1.x days.
@@ -3721,13 +3684,6 @@ N: Dirk Verworner
D: Co-author of German book ``Linux-Kernel-Programmierung''
D: Co-founder of Berlin Linux User Group
N: Andrew Victor
E: linux@maxim.org.za
W: http://maxim.org.za/at91_26.html
D: First maintainer of Atmel ARM-based SoC, aka AT91
D: Introduced support for at91rm9200, the first chip of AT91 family
S: South Africa
N: Riku Voipio
E: riku.voipio@iki.fi
D: Author of PCA9532 LED and Fintek f75375s hwmon driver

View File

@@ -1,119 +0,0 @@
What: /sys/block/zram<id>/num_reads
Date: August 2015
Contact: Sergey Senozhatsky <sergey.senozhatsky@gmail.com>
Description:
The num_reads file is read-only and specifies the number of
reads (failed or successful) done on this device.
Now accessible via zram<id>/stat node.
What: /sys/block/zram<id>/num_writes
Date: August 2015
Contact: Sergey Senozhatsky <sergey.senozhatsky@gmail.com>
Description:
The num_writes file is read-only and specifies the number of
writes (failed or successful) done on this device.
Now accessible via zram<id>/stat node.
What: /sys/block/zram<id>/invalid_io
Date: August 2015
Contact: Sergey Senozhatsky <sergey.senozhatsky@gmail.com>
Description:
The invalid_io file is read-only and specifies the number of
non-page-size-aligned I/O requests issued to this device.
Now accessible via zram<id>/io_stat node.
What: /sys/block/zram<id>/failed_reads
Date: August 2015
Contact: Sergey Senozhatsky <sergey.senozhatsky@gmail.com>
Description:
The failed_reads file is read-only and specifies the number of
failed reads happened on this device.
Now accessible via zram<id>/io_stat node.
What: /sys/block/zram<id>/failed_writes
Date: August 2015
Contact: Sergey Senozhatsky <sergey.senozhatsky@gmail.com>
Description:
The failed_writes file is read-only and specifies the number of
failed writes happened on this device.
Now accessible via zram<id>/io_stat node.
What: /sys/block/zram<id>/notify_free
Date: August 2015
Contact: Sergey Senozhatsky <sergey.senozhatsky@gmail.com>
Description:
The notify_free file is read-only. Depending on device usage
scenario it may account a) the number of pages freed because
of swap slot free notifications or b) the number of pages freed
because of REQ_DISCARD requests sent by bio. The former ones
are sent to a swap block device when a swap slot is freed, which
implies that this disk is being used as a swap disk. The latter
ones are sent by filesystem mounted with discard option,
whenever some data blocks are getting discarded.
Now accessible via zram<id>/io_stat node.
What: /sys/block/zram<id>/zero_pages
Date: August 2015
Contact: Sergey Senozhatsky <sergey.senozhatsky@gmail.com>
Description:
The zero_pages file is read-only and specifies number of zero
filled pages written to this disk. No memory is allocated for
such pages.
Now accessible via zram<id>/mm_stat node.
What: /sys/block/zram<id>/orig_data_size
Date: August 2015
Contact: Sergey Senozhatsky <sergey.senozhatsky@gmail.com>
Description:
The orig_data_size file is read-only and specifies uncompressed
size of data stored in this disk. This excludes zero-filled
pages (zero_pages) since no memory is allocated for them.
Unit: bytes
Now accessible via zram<id>/mm_stat node.
What: /sys/block/zram<id>/compr_data_size
Date: August 2015
Contact: Sergey Senozhatsky <sergey.senozhatsky@gmail.com>
Description:
The compr_data_size file is read-only and specifies compressed
size of data stored in this disk. So, compression ratio can be
calculated using orig_data_size and this statistic.
Unit: bytes
Now accessible via zram<id>/mm_stat node.
What: /sys/block/zram<id>/mem_used_total
Date: August 2015
Contact: Sergey Senozhatsky <sergey.senozhatsky@gmail.com>
Description:
The mem_used_total file is read-only and specifies the amount
of memory, including allocator fragmentation and metadata
overhead, allocated for this disk. So, allocator space
efficiency can be calculated using compr_data_size and this
statistic.
Unit: bytes
Now accessible via zram<id>/mm_stat node.
What: /sys/block/zram<id>/mem_used_max
Date: August 2015
Contact: Sergey Senozhatsky <sergey.senozhatsky@gmail.com>
Description:
The mem_used_max file is read/write and specifies the amount
of maximum memory zram have consumed to store compressed data.
For resetting the value, you should write "0". Otherwise,
you could see -EINVAL.
Unit: bytes
Downgraded to write-only node: so it's possible to set new
value only; its current value is stored in zram<id>/mm_stat
node.
What: /sys/block/zram<id>/mem_limit
Date: August 2015
Contact: Sergey Senozhatsky <sergey.senozhatsky@gmail.com>
Description:
The mem_limit file is read/write and specifies the maximum
amount of memory ZRAM can use to store the compressed data.
The limit could be changed in run time and "0" means disable
the limit. No limit is the initial state. Unit: bytes
Downgraded to write-only node: so it's possible to set new
value only; its current value is stored in zram<id>/mm_stat
node.

View File

@@ -1,14 +1,3 @@
What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/actual_profile
Date: October 2010
Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
Description: The integer value of this attribute ranges from 0-4.
When read, this attribute returns the number of the actual
profile. This value is persistent, so its equivalent to the
profile that's active when the mouse is powered on next time.
When written, this file sets the number of the startup profile
and the mouse activates this profile immediately.
Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/startup_profile
Date: October 2010
Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
@@ -33,40 +22,6 @@ Description: When read, this file returns the raw integer version number of the
Please read binary attribute info which contains firmware version.
Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/info
Date: November 2012
Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
Description: When read, this file returns general data like firmware version.
When written, the device can be reset.
The data is 8 bytes long.
Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/macro
Date: October 2010
Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
Description: The mouse can store a macro with max 500 key/button strokes
internally.
When written, this file lets one set the sequence for a specific
button for a specific profile. Button and profile numbers are
included in written data. The data has to be 2082 bytes long.
This file is writeonly.
Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/profile_buttons
Date: August 2010
Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the
press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons.
profile_buttons holds information about button layout.
When written, this file lets one write the respective profile
buttons back to the mouse. The data has to be 77 bytes long.
The mouse will reject invalid data.
Which profile to write is determined by the profile number
contained in the data.
Before reading this file, control has to be written to select
which profile to read.
Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/profile[1-5]_buttons
Date: August 2010
Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
@@ -79,22 +34,6 @@ Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the
Write control to select profile and read profile_buttons instead.
Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/profile_settings
Date: October 2010
Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the
press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons.
profile_settings holds information like resolution, sensitivity
and light effects.
When written, this file lets one write the respective profile
settings back to the mouse. The data has to be 43 bytes long.
The mouse will reject invalid data.
Which profile to write is determined by the profile number
contained in the data.
Before reading this file, control has to be written to select
which profile to read.
Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/profile[1-5]_settings
Date: August 2010
Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
@@ -106,40 +45,4 @@ Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the
The returned data is 43 bytes in size.
This file is readonly.
Write control to select profile and read profile_settings instead.
Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/sensor
Date: October 2010
Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
Description: The mouse has a tracking- and a distance-control-unit. These
can be activated/deactivated and the lift-off distance can be
set. The data has to be 6 bytes long.
This file is writeonly.
Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/talk
Date: May 2011
Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
Description: Used to active some easy* functions of the mouse from outside.
The data has to be 16 bytes long.
This file is writeonly.
Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/tcu
Date: October 2010
Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
Description: When written a calibration process for the tracking control unit
can be initiated/cancelled. Also lets one read/write sensor
registers.
The data has to be 4 bytes long.
Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/tcu_image
Date: October 2010
Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
Description: When read the mouse returns a 30x30 pixel image of the
sampled underground. This works only in the course of a
calibration process initiated with tcu.
The returned data is 1028 bytes in size.
This file is readonly.
Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net

View File

@@ -8,17 +8,6 @@ Description: The integer value of this attribute ranges from 1-4.
Has never been used. If bookkeeping is done, it's done in userland tools.
Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kovaplus/roccatkovaplus<minor>/actual_profile
Date: January 2011
Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
Description: The integer value of this attribute ranges from 0-4.
When read, this attribute returns the number of the active
profile.
When written, the mouse activates this profile immediately.
The profile that's active when powered down is the same that's
active when the mouse is powered on.
Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kovaplus/roccatkovaplus<minor>/actual_sensitivity_x
Date: January 2011
Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
@@ -51,29 +40,6 @@ Description: When read, this file returns the raw integer version number of the
Obsoleted by binary sysfs attribute "info".
Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kovaplus/roccatkovaplus<minor>/info
Date: November 2012
Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
Description: When read, this file returns general data like firmware version.
When written, the device can be reset.
The data is 6 bytes long.
Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kovaplus/roccatkovaplus<minor>/profile_buttons
Date: January 2011
Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the
press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons.
profile_buttons holds information about button layout.
When written, this file lets one write the respective profile
buttons back to the mouse. The data has to be 23 bytes long.
The mouse will reject invalid data.
Which profile to write is determined by the profile number
contained in the data.
Before reading this file, control has to be written to select
which profile to read.
Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kovaplus/roccatkovaplus<minor>/profile[1-5]_buttons
Date: January 2011
Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
@@ -86,22 +52,6 @@ Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the
Write control to select profile and read profile_buttons instead.
Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kovaplus/roccatkovaplus<minor>/profile_settings
Date: January 2011
Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the
press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons.
profile_settings holds information like resolution, sensitivity
and light effects.
When written, this file lets one write the respective profile
settings back to the mouse. The data has to be 16 bytes long.
The mouse will reject invalid data.
Which profile to write is determined by the profile number
contained in the data.
Before reading this file, control has to be written to select
which profile to read.
Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kovaplus/roccatkovaplus<minor>/profile[1-5]_settings
Date: January 2011
Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>

View File

@@ -37,29 +37,6 @@ Description: When read, this file returns the raw integer version number of the
Please use binary attribute "info" which provides this information.
Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/info
Date: November 2012
Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
Description: When read, this file returns general data like firmware version.
When written, the device can be reset.
The data is 6 bytes long.
Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/profile_buttons
Date: August 2010
Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the
press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons.
profile_buttons holds information about button layout.
When written, this file lets one write the respective profile
buttons back to the mouse. The data has to be 19 bytes long.
The mouse will reject invalid data.
Which profile to write is determined by the profile number
contained in the data.
Before reading this file, control has to be written to select
which profile to read.
Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/profile[1-5]_buttons
Date: August 2010
Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
@@ -72,22 +49,6 @@ Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the
Write control to select profile and read profile_buttons instead.
Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/profile_settings
Date: August 2010
Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the
press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons.
profile_settings holds information like resolution, sensitivity
and light effects.
When written, this file lets one write the respective profile
settings back to the mouse. The data has to be 13 bytes long.
The mouse will reject invalid data.
Which profile to write is determined by the profile number
contained in the data.
Before reading this file, control has to be written to select
which profile to read.
Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/profile[1-5]_settings
Date: August 2010
Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
@@ -101,17 +62,6 @@ Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the
Write control to select profile and read profile_settings instead.
Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/settings
Date: August 2010
Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
Description: When read, this file returns the settings stored in the mouse.
The size of the data is 3 bytes and holds information on the
startup_profile.
When written, this file lets write settings back to the mouse.
The data has to be 3 bytes long. The mouse will reject invalid
data.
Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/startup_profile
Date: August 2010
Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>

View File

@@ -1,29 +0,0 @@
What: /sys/bus/vmbus/devices/vmbus_*/id
Date: Jul 2009
KernelVersion: 2.6.31
Contact: K. Y. Srinivasan <kys@microsoft.com>
Description: The VMBus child_relid of the device's primary channel
Users: tools/hv/lsvmbus
What: /sys/bus/vmbus/devices/vmbus_*/class_id
Date: Jul 2009
KernelVersion: 2.6.31
Contact: K. Y. Srinivasan <kys@microsoft.com>
Description: The VMBus interface type GUID of the device
Users: tools/hv/lsvmbus
What: /sys/bus/vmbus/devices/vmbus_*/device_id
Date: Jul 2009
KernelVersion: 2.6.31
Contact: K. Y. Srinivasan <kys@microsoft.com>
Description: The VMBus interface instance GUID of the device
Users: tools/hv/lsvmbus
What: /sys/bus/vmbus/devices/vmbus_*/channel_vp_mapping
Date: Jul 2015
KernelVersion: 4.2.0
Contact: K. Y. Srinivasan <kys@microsoft.com>
Description: The mapping of which primary/sub channels are bound to which
Virtual Processors.
Format: <channel's child_relid:the bound cpu's number>
Users: tools/hv/lsvmbus

View File

@@ -1,11 +0,0 @@
What: /sys/bus/w1/devices/.../w1_master_timeout_us
Date: April 2015
Contact: Dmitry Khromov <dk@icelogic.net>
Description: Bus scanning interval, microseconds component.
Some of 1-Wire devices commonly associated with physical access
control systems are attached/generate presence for as short as
100 ms - hence the tens-to-hundreds milliseconds scan intervals
are required.
see Documentation/w1/w1.generic for detailed information.
Users: any user space application which wants to know bus scanning
interval

View File

@@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ Description: The "pubek" property will return the TPM's public endorsement
owner's authorization. Since the TPM driver doesn't store any
secrets, it can't authorize its own request for the pubek,
making it unaccessible. The public endorsement key is gener-
ated at TPM manufacture time and exists for the life of the
ated at TPM menufacture time and exists for the life of the
chip.
Example output:
@@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ Date: April 2006
KernelVersion: 2.6.17
Contact: tpmdd-devel@lists.sf.net
Description: The "temp_deactivated" property returns a '1' if the chip has
been temporarily deactivated, usually until the next power
been temporarily dectivated, usually until the next power
cycle. Whether a warm boot (reboot) will clear a TPM chip
from a temp_deactivated state is platform specific.

View File

@@ -1,10 +0,0 @@
# Note: This documents additional properties of any device beyond what
# is documented in Documentation/sysfs-rules.txt
What: /sys/devices/*/of_path
Date: February 2015
Contact: Device Tree mailing list <devicetree@vger.kernel.org>
Description:
Any device associated with a device-tree node will have
an of_path symlink pointing to the corresponding device
node in /sys/firmware/devicetree/

View File

@@ -1,6 +0,0 @@
What: /sys/bus/w1/devices/.../w1_seq
Date: Apr 2015
Contact: Matt Campbell <mattrcampbell@gmail.com>
Description: Support for the DS28EA00 chain sequence function
see Documentation/w1/slaves/w1_therm for detailed information
Users: any user space application which wants to communicate with DS28EA00

View File

@@ -57,4 +57,4 @@ Description:
Shortly after acknowledging it, the log
entry will be removed from sysfs.
Reading this file will list the supported
operations (currently just acknowledge).
operations (curently just acknowledge).

View File

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
What: /config/pcie-gadget
Date: Feb 2011
KernelVersion: 2.6.37
Contact: Pratyush Anand <pratyush.anand@gmail.com>
Contact: Pratyush Anand <pratyush.anand@st.com>
Description:
Interface is used to configure selected dual mode PCIe controller

View File

@@ -1,48 +0,0 @@
What: /config/stp-policy
Date: June 2015
KernelVersion: 4.3
Description:
This group contains policies mandating Master/Channel allocation
for software sources wishing to send trace data over an STM
device.
What: /config/stp-policy/<device>.<policy>
Date: June 2015
KernelVersion: 4.3
Description:
This group is the root of a policy; its name is a concatenation
of an stm device name to which this policy applies and an
arbitrary string. If <device> part doesn't match an existing
stm device, mkdir will fail with ENODEV; if that device already
has a policy assigned to it, mkdir will fail with EBUSY.
What: /config/stp-policy/<device>.<policy>/device
Date: June 2015
KernelVersion: 4.3
Description:
STM device to which this policy applies, read only. Same as the
<device> component of its parent directory.
What: /config/stp-policy/<device>.<policy>/<node>
Date: June 2015
KernelVersion: 4.3
Description:
Policy node is a string identifier that software clients will
use to request a master/channel to be allocated and assigned to
them.
What: /config/stp-policy/<device>.<policy>/<node>/masters
Date: June 2015
KernelVersion: 4.3
Description:
Range of masters from which to allocate for users of this node.
Write two numbers: the first master and the last master number.
What: /config/stp-policy/<device>.<policy>/<node>/channels
Date: June 2015
KernelVersion: 4.3
Description:
Range of channels from which to allocate for users of this node.
Write two numbers: the first channel and the last channel
number.

View File

@@ -5,4 +5,4 @@ Description:
The attributes:
qlen - depth of loopback queue
buflen - buffer length
bulk_buflen - buffer length

View File

@@ -1,9 +0,0 @@
What: /config/usb-gadget/gadget/functions/printer.name
Date: Apr 2015
KernelVersion: 4.1
Description:
The attributes:
pnp_string - Data to be passed to the host in pnp string
q_len - Number of requests per endpoint

View File

@@ -9,4 +9,4 @@ Description:
isoc_maxpacket - 0 - 1023 (fs), 0 - 1024 (hs/ss)
isoc_mult - 0..2 (hs/ss only)
isoc_maxburst - 0..15 (ss only)
buflen - buffer length
qlen - buffer length

View File

@@ -98,13 +98,4 @@ Description: The /dev/kmsg character device node provides userspace access
logic is used internally when messages are printed to the
console, /proc/kmsg or the syslog() syscall.
By default, kernel tries to avoid fragments by concatenating
when it can and fragments are rare; however, when extended
console support is enabled, the in-kernel concatenation is
disabled and /dev/kmsg output will contain more fragments. If
the log consumer performs concatenation, the end result
should be the same. In the future, the in-kernel concatenation
may be removed entirely and /dev/kmsg users are recommended to
implement fragment handling.
Users: dmesg(1), userspace kernel log consumers

View File

@@ -20,19 +20,17 @@ Description:
action: measure | dont_measure | appraise | dont_appraise | audit
condition:= base | lsm [option]
base: [[func=] [mask=] [fsmagic=] [fsuuid=] [uid=]
[euid=] [fowner=]]
[fowner]]
lsm: [[subj_user=] [subj_role=] [subj_type=]
[obj_user=] [obj_role=] [obj_type=]]
option: [[appraise_type=]] [permit_directio]
base: func:= [BPRM_CHECK][MMAP_CHECK][FILE_CHECK][MODULE_CHECK]
[FIRMWARE_CHECK]
mask:= [[^]MAY_READ] [[^]MAY_WRITE] [[^]MAY_APPEND]
[[^]MAY_EXEC]
mask:= [MAY_READ] [MAY_WRITE] [MAY_APPEND] [MAY_EXEC]
fsmagic:= hex value
fsuuid:= file system UUID (e.g 8bcbe394-4f13-4144-be8e-5aa9ea2ce2f6)
uid:= decimal value
euid:= decimal value
fowner:=decimal value
lsm: are LSM specific
option: appraise_type:= [imasig]
@@ -51,25 +49,11 @@ Description:
dont_measure fsmagic=0x01021994
dont_appraise fsmagic=0x01021994
# RAMFS_MAGIC
dont_measure fsmagic=0x858458f6
dont_appraise fsmagic=0x858458f6
# DEVPTS_SUPER_MAGIC
dont_measure fsmagic=0x1cd1
dont_appraise fsmagic=0x1cd1
# BINFMTFS_MAGIC
dont_measure fsmagic=0x42494e4d
dont_appraise fsmagic=0x42494e4d
# SECURITYFS_MAGIC
dont_measure fsmagic=0x73636673
dont_appraise fsmagic=0x73636673
# SELINUX_MAGIC
dont_measure fsmagic=0xf97cff8c
dont_appraise fsmagic=0xf97cff8c
# CGROUP_SUPER_MAGIC
dont_measure fsmagic=0x27e0eb
dont_appraise fsmagic=0x27e0eb
# NSFS_MAGIC
dont_measure fsmagic=0x6e736673
dont_appraise fsmagic=0x6e736673
measure func=BPRM_CHECK
measure func=FILE_MMAP mask=MAY_EXEC
@@ -86,6 +70,10 @@ Description:
Examples of LSM specific definitions:
SELinux:
# SELINUX_MAGIC
dont_measure fsmagic=0xf97cff8c
dont_appraise fsmagic=0xf97cff8c
dont_measure obj_type=var_log_t
dont_appraise obj_type=var_log_t
dont_measure obj_type=auditd_log_t

View File

@@ -90,17 +90,6 @@ gscr
130: SATA_PMP_GSCR_SII_GPIO
Only valid if the device is a PM.
trim
Shows the DSM TRIM mode currently used by the device. Valid
values are:
unsupported: Drive does not support DSM TRIM
unqueued: Drive supports unqueued DSM TRIM only
queued: Drive supports queued DSM TRIM
forced_unqueued: Drive's queued DSM support is known to be
buggy and only unqueued TRIM commands
are sent
spdn_cnt
Number of time libata decided to lower the speed of link due to errors.

View File

@@ -60,13 +60,6 @@ Description:
Indicates whether a storage device is capable of storing
integrity metadata. Set if the device is T10 PI-capable.
What: /sys/block/<disk>/integrity/protection_interval_bytes
Date: July 2015
Contact: Martin K. Petersen <martin.petersen@oracle.com>
Description:
Describes the number of data bytes which are protected
by one integrity tuple. Typically the device's logical
block size.
What: /sys/block/<disk>/integrity/write_generate
Date: June 2008

View File

@@ -23,25 +23,3 @@ Description: Device-mapper device suspend state.
Contains the value 1 while the device is suspended.
Otherwise it contains 0. Read-only attribute.
Users: util-linux, device-mapper udev rules
What: /sys/block/dm-<num>/dm/rq_based_seq_io_merge_deadline
Date: March 2015
KernelVersion: 4.1
Contact: dm-devel@redhat.com
Description: Allow control over how long a request that is a
reasonable merge candidate can be queued on the request
queue. The resolution of this deadline is in
microseconds (ranging from 1 to 100000 usecs).
Setting this attribute to 0 (the default) will disable
request-based DM's merge heuristic and associated extra
accounting. This attribute is not applicable to
bio-based DM devices so it will only ever report 0 for
them.
What: /sys/block/dm-<num>/dm/use_blk_mq
Date: March 2015
KernelVersion: 4.1
Contact: dm-devel@redhat.com
Description: Request-based Device-mapper blk-mq I/O path mode.
Contains the value 1 if the device is using blk-mq.
Otherwise it contains 0. Read-only attribute.

View File

@@ -141,28 +141,3 @@ Description:
amount of memory ZRAM can use to store the compressed data. The
limit could be changed in run time and "0" means disable the
limit. No limit is the initial state. Unit: bytes
What: /sys/block/zram<id>/compact
Date: August 2015
Contact: Minchan Kim <minchan@kernel.org>
Description:
The compact file is write-only and trigger compaction for
allocator zrm uses. The allocator moves some objects so that
it could free fragment space.
What: /sys/block/zram<id>/io_stat
Date: August 2015
Contact: Sergey Senozhatsky <sergey.senozhatsky@gmail.com>
Description:
The io_stat file is read-only and accumulates device's I/O
statistics not accounted by block layer. For example,
failed_reads, failed_writes, etc. File format is similar to
block layer statistics file format.
What: /sys/block/zram<id>/mm_stat
Date: August 2015
Contact: Sergey Senozhatsky <sergey.senozhatsky@gmail.com>
Description:
The mm_stat file is read-only and represents device's mm
statistics (orig_data_size, compr_data_size, etc.) in a format
similar to block layer statistics file format.

View File

@@ -8,6 +8,13 @@ Description: (RW) Enable/disable tracing on this specific trace entiry.
of coresight components linking the source to the sink is
configured and managed automatically by the coresight framework.
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.[etm|ptm]/status
Date: November 2014
KernelVersion: 3.19
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (R) List various control and status registers. The specific
layout and content is driver specific.
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.[etm|ptm]/addr_idx
Date: November 2014
KernelVersion: 3.19
@@ -105,7 +112,7 @@ KernelVersion: 3.19
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (RW) Mask to apply to all the context ID comparator.
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.[etm|ptm]/ctxid_pid
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.[etm|ptm]/ctxid_val
Date: November 2014
KernelVersion: 3.19
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
@@ -244,79 +251,3 @@ Date: November 2014
KernelVersion: 3.19
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (RW) Define the event that controls the trigger.
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.[etm|ptm]/cpu
Date: October 2015
KernelVersion: 4.4
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (RO) Holds the cpu number this tracer is affined to.
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.[etm|ptm]/mgmt/etmccr
Date: September 2015
KernelVersion: 4.4
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (RO) Print the content of the ETM Configuration Code register
(0x004). The value is read directly from the HW.
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.[etm|ptm]/mgmt/etmccer
Date: September 2015
KernelVersion: 4.4
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (RO) Print the content of the ETM Configuration Code Extension
register (0x1e8). The value is read directly from the HW.
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.[etm|ptm]/mgmt/etmscr
Date: September 2015
KernelVersion: 4.4
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (RO) Print the content of the ETM System Configuration
register (0x014). The value is read directly from the HW.
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.[etm|ptm]/mgmt/etmidr
Date: September 2015
KernelVersion: 4.4
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (RO) Print the content of the ETM ID register (0x1e4). The
value is read directly from the HW.
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.[etm|ptm]/mgmt/etmcr
Date: September 2015
KernelVersion: 4.4
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (RO) Print the content of the ETM Main Control register (0x000).
The value is read directly from the HW.
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.[etm|ptm]/mgmt/etmtraceidr
Date: September 2015
KernelVersion: 4.4
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (RO) Print the content of the ETM Trace ID register (0x200).
The value is read directly from the HW.
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.[etm|ptm]/mgmt/etmteevr
Date: September 2015
KernelVersion: 4.4
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (RO) Print the content of the ETM Trace Enable Event register
(0x020). The value is read directly from the HW.
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.[etm|ptm]/mgmt/etmtsscr
Date: September 2015
KernelVersion: 4.4
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (RO) Print the content of the ETM Trace Start/Stop Conrol
register (0x018). The value is read directly from the HW.
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.[etm|ptm]/mgmt/etmtecr1
Date: September 2015
KernelVersion: 4.4
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (RO) Print the content of the ETM Enable Conrol #1
register (0x024). The value is read directly from the HW.
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.[etm|ptm]/mgmt/etmtecr2
Date: September 2015
KernelVersion: 4.4
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (RO) Print the content of the ETM Enable Conrol #2
register (0x01c). The value is read directly from the HW.

View File

@@ -1,450 +0,0 @@
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.etm/enable_source
Date: April 2015
KernelVersion: 4.01
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (RW) Enable/disable tracing on this specific trace entiry.
Enabling a source implies the source has been configured
properly and a sink has been identidifed for it. The path
of coresight components linking the source to the sink is
configured and managed automatically by the coresight framework.
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.etm/cpu
Date: April 2015
KernelVersion: 4.01
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (R) The CPU this tracing entity is associated with.
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.etm/nr_pe_cmp
Date: April 2015
KernelVersion: 4.01
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (R) Indicates the number of PE comparator inputs that are
available for tracing.
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.etm/nr_addr_cmp
Date: April 2015
KernelVersion: 4.01
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (R) Indicates the number of address comparator pairs that are
available for tracing.
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.etm/nr_cntr
Date: April 2015
KernelVersion: 4.01
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (R) Indicates the number of counters that are available for
tracing.
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.etm/nr_ext_inp
Date: April 2015
KernelVersion: 4.01
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (R) Indicates how many external inputs are implemented.
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.etm/numcidc
Date: April 2015
KernelVersion: 4.01
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (R) Indicates the number of Context ID comparators that are
available for tracing.
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.etm/numvmidc
Date: April 2015
KernelVersion: 4.01
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (R) Indicates the number of VMID comparators that are available
for tracing.
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.etm/nrseqstate
Date: April 2015
KernelVersion: 4.01
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (R) Indicates the number of sequencer states that are
implemented.
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.etm/nr_resource
Date: April 2015
KernelVersion: 4.01
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (R) Indicates the number of resource selection pairs that are
available for tracing.
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.etm/nr_ss_cmp
Date: April 2015
KernelVersion: 4.01
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (R) Indicates the number of single-shot comparator controls that
are available for tracing.
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.etm/reset
Date: April 2015
KernelVersion: 4.01
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (W) Cancels all configuration on a trace unit and set it back
to its boot configuration.
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.etm/mode
Date: April 2015
KernelVersion: 4.01
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (RW) Controls various modes supported by this ETM, for example
P0 instruction tracing, branch broadcast, cycle counting and
context ID tracing.
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.etm/pe
Date: April 2015
KernelVersion: 4.01
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (RW) Controls which PE to trace.
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.etm/event
Date: April 2015
KernelVersion: 4.01
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (RW) Controls the tracing of arbitrary events from bank 0 to 3.
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.etm/event_instren
Date: April 2015
KernelVersion: 4.01
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (RW) Controls the behavior of the events in bank 0 to 3.
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.etm/event_ts
Date: April 2015
KernelVersion: 4.01
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (RW) Controls the insertion of global timestamps in the trace
streams.
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.etm/syncfreq
Date: April 2015
KernelVersion: 4.01
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (RW) Controls how often trace synchronization requests occur.
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.etm/cyc_threshold
Date: April 2015
KernelVersion: 4.01
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (RW) Sets the threshold value for cycle counting.
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.etm/bb_ctrl
Date: April 2015
KernelVersion: 4.01
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (RW) Controls which regions in the memory map are enabled to
use branch broadcasting.
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.etm/event_vinst
Date: April 2015
KernelVersion: 4.01
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (RW) Controls instruction trace filtering.
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.etm/s_exlevel_vinst
Date: April 2015
KernelVersion: 4.01
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (RW) In Secure state, each bit controls whether instruction
tracing is enabled for the corresponding exception level.
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.etm/ns_exlevel_vinst
Date: April 2015
KernelVersion: 4.01
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (RW) In non-secure state, each bit controls whether instruction
tracing is enabled for the corresponding exception level.
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.etm/addr_idx
Date: April 2015
KernelVersion: 4.01
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (RW) Select which address comparator or pair (of comparators) to
work with.
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.etm/addr_instdatatype
Date: April 2015
KernelVersion: 4.01
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (RW) Controls what type of comparison the trace unit performs.
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.etm/addr_single
Date: April 2015
KernelVersion: 4.01
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (RW) Used to setup single address comparator values.
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.etm/addr_range
Date: April 2015
KernelVersion: 4.01
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (RW) Used to setup address range comparator values.
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.etm/seq_idx
Date: April 2015
KernelVersion: 4.01
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (RW) Select which sequensor.
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.etm/seq_state
Date: April 2015
KernelVersion: 4.01
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (RW) Use this to set, or read, the sequencer state.
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.etm/seq_event
Date: April 2015
KernelVersion: 4.01
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (RW) Moves the sequencer state to a specific state.
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.etm/seq_reset_event
Date: April 2015
KernelVersion: 4.01
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (RW) Moves the sequencer to state 0 when a programmed event
occurs.
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.etm/cntr_idx
Date: April 2015
KernelVersion: 4.01
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (RW) Select which counter unit to work with.
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.etm/cntrldvr
Date: April 2015
KernelVersion: 4.01
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (RW) This sets or returns the reload count value of the
specific counter.
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.etm/cntr_val
Date: April 2015
KernelVersion: 4.01
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (RW) This sets or returns the current count value of the
specific counter.
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.etm/cntr_ctrl
Date: April 2015
KernelVersion: 4.01
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (RW) Controls the operation of the selected counter.
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.etm/res_idx
Date: April 2015
KernelVersion: 4.01
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (RW) Select which resource selection unit to work with.
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.etm/res_ctrl
Date: April 2015
KernelVersion: 4.01
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (RW) Controls the selection of the resources in the trace unit.
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.etm/ctxid_idx
Date: April 2015
KernelVersion: 4.01
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (RW) Select which context ID comparator to work with.
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.etm/ctxid_pid
Date: April 2015
KernelVersion: 4.01
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (RW) Get/Set the context ID comparator value to trigger on.
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.etm/ctxid_masks
Date: April 2015
KernelVersion: 4.01
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (RW) Mask for all 8 context ID comparator value
registers (if implemented).
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.etm/vmid_idx
Date: April 2015
KernelVersion: 4.01
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (RW) Select which virtual machine ID comparator to work with.
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.etm/vmid_val
Date: April 2015
KernelVersion: 4.01
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (RW) Get/Set the virtual machine ID comparator value to
trigger on.
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.etm/vmid_masks
Date: April 2015
KernelVersion: 4.01
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (RW) Mask for all 8 virtual machine ID comparator value
registers (if implemented).
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.etm/mgmt/trcoslsr
Date: April 2015
KernelVersion: 4.01
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (R) Print the content of the OS Lock Status Register (0x304).
The value it taken directly from the HW.
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.etm/mgmt/trcpdcr
Date: April 2015
KernelVersion: 4.01
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (R) Print the content of the Power Down Control Register
(0x310). The value is taken directly from the HW.
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.etm/mgmt/trcpdsr
Date: April 2015
KernelVersion: 4.01
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (R) Print the content of the Power Down Status Register
(0x314). The value is taken directly from the HW.
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.etm/mgmt/trclsr
Date: April 2015
KernelVersion: 4.01
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (R) Print the content of the SW Lock Status Register
(0xFB4). The value is taken directly from the HW.
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.etm/mgmt/trcauthstatus
Date: April 2015
KernelVersion: 4.01
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (R) Print the content of the Authentication Status Register
(0xFB8). The value is taken directly from the HW.
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.etm/mgmt/trcdevid
Date: April 2015
KernelVersion: 4.01
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (R) Print the content of the Device ID Register
(0xFC8). The value is taken directly from the HW.
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.etm/mgmt/trcdevtype
Date: April 2015
KernelVersion: 4.01
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (R) Print the content of the Device Type Register
(0xFCC). The value is taken directly from the HW.
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.etm/mgmt/trcpidr0
Date: April 2015
KernelVersion: 4.01
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (R) Print the content of the Peripheral ID0 Register
(0xFE0). The value is taken directly from the HW.
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.etm/mgmt/trcpidr1
Date: April 2015
KernelVersion: 4.01
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (R) Print the content of the Peripheral ID1 Register
(0xFE4). The value is taken directly from the HW.
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.etm/mgmt/trcpidr2
Date: April 2015
KernelVersion: 4.01
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (R) Print the content of the Peripheral ID2 Register
(0xFE8). The value is taken directly from the HW.
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.etm/mgmt/trcpidr3
Date: April 2015
KernelVersion: 4.01
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (R) Print the content of the Peripheral ID3 Register
(0xFEC). The value is taken directly from the HW.
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.etm/trcidr/trcidr0
Date: April 2015
KernelVersion: 4.01
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (R) Returns the tracing capabilities of the trace unit (0x1E0).
The value is taken directly from the HW.
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.etm/trcidr/trcidr1
Date: April 2015
KernelVersion: 4.01
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (R) Returns the tracing capabilities of the trace unit (0x1E4).
The value is taken directly from the HW.
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.etm/trcidr/trcidr2
Date: April 2015
KernelVersion: 4.01
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (R) Returns the maximum size of the data value, data address,
VMID, context ID and instuction address in the trace unit
(0x1E8). The value is taken directly from the HW.
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.etm/trcidr/trcidr3
Date: April 2015
KernelVersion: 4.01
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (R) Returns the value associated with various resources
available to the trace unit. See the Trace Macrocell
architecture specification for more details (0x1E8).
The value is taken directly from the HW.
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.etm/trcidr/trcidr4
Date: April 2015
KernelVersion: 4.01
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (R) Returns how many resources the trace unit supports (0x1F0).
The value is taken directly from the HW.
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.etm/trcidr/trcidr5
Date: April 2015
KernelVersion: 4.01
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (R) Returns how many resources the trace unit supports (0x1F4).
The value is taken directly from the HW.
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.etm/trcidr/trcidr8
Date: April 2015
KernelVersion: 4.01
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (R) Returns the maximum speculation depth of the instruction
trace stream. (0x180). The value is taken directly from the HW.
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.etm/trcidr/trcidr9
Date: April 2015
KernelVersion: 4.01
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (R) Returns the number of P0 right-hand keys that the trace unit
can use (0x184). The value is taken directly from the HW.
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.etm/trcidr/trcidr10
Date: April 2015
KernelVersion: 4.01
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (R) Returns the number of P1 right-hand keys that the trace unit
can use (0x188). The value is taken directly from the HW.
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.etm/trcidr/trcidr11
Date: April 2015
KernelVersion: 4.01
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (R) Returns the number of special P1 right-hand keys that the
trace unit can use (0x18C). The value is taken directly from
the HW.
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.etm/trcidr/trcidr12
Date: April 2015
KernelVersion: 4.01
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (R) Returns the number of conditional P1 right-hand keys that
the trace unit can use (0x190). The value is taken directly
from the HW.
What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.etm/trcidr/trcidr13
Date: April 2015
KernelVersion: 4.01
Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org>
Description: (R) Returns the number of special conditional P1 right-hand keys
that the trace unit can use (0x194). The value is taken
directly from the HW.

View File

@@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ Description: 'FCoE Controller' instances on the fcoe bus.
Attributes:
fcf_dev_loss_tmo: Device loss timeout period (see below). Changing
fcf_dev_loss_tmo: Device loss timeout peroid (see below). Changing
this value will change the dev_loss_tmo for all
FCFs discovered by this controller.
@@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ Attributes:
lesb/err_block: Link Error Status Block (LESB) block error count.
lesb/fcs_error: Link Error Status Block (LESB) Fibre Channel
Services error count.
Serivces error count.
Notes: ctlr_X (global increment starting at 0)
@@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ Attributes:
fabric.
selected: 1 indicates that the switch has been selected for use;
0 indicates that the switch will not be used.
0 indicates that the swich will not be used.
fc_map: The Fibre Channel MAP
@@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ Attributes:
mac: The FCF's MAC address
fka_period: The FIP Keep-Alive period
fka_peroid: The FIP Keep-Alive peroid
fabric_state: The internal kernel state
"Unknown" - Initialization value
@@ -101,9 +101,9 @@ Attributes:
"Connected" - Host is connected to the FCF
"Deleted" - FCF is being removed from the system
dev_loss_tmo: The device loss timeout period for this FCF.
dev_loss_tmo: The device loss timeout peroid for this FCF.
Notes: A device loss infrastructure similar to the FC Transport's
Notes: A device loss infrastructre similar to the FC Transport's
is present in fcoe_sysfs. It is nice to have so that a
link flapping adapter doesn't continually advance the count
used to identify the discovered FCF. FCFs will exist in a

View File

@@ -71,8 +71,6 @@ Description:
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_voltageY_raw
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_voltageY_supply_raw
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_voltageY_i_raw
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_voltageY_q_raw
KernelVersion: 2.6.35
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
@@ -83,11 +81,6 @@ Description:
unique to allow association with event codes. Units after
application of scale and offset are millivolts.
Channels with 'i' and 'q' modifiers always exist in pairs and both
channels refer to the same signal. The 'i' channel contains the in-phase
component of the signal while the 'q' channel contains the quadrature
component.
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_voltageY-voltageZ_raw
KernelVersion: 2.6.35
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
@@ -253,23 +246,13 @@ What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_accel_y_offset
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_accel_z_offset
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_voltageY_offset
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_voltage_offset
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_voltageY_i_offset
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_voltageY_q_offset
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_voltage_q_offset
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_voltage_i_offset
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_currentY_offset
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_current_offset
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_currentY_i_offset
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_currentY_q_offset
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_current_q_offset
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_current_i_offset
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_tempY_offset
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_temp_offset
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_pressureY_offset
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_pressure_offset
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_humidityrelative_offset
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_magn_offset
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_rot_offset
KernelVersion: 2.6.35
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
@@ -288,22 +271,14 @@ Description:
to the _raw output.
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_voltageY_scale
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_voltageY_i_scale
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_voltageY_q_scale
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_voltageY_supply_scale
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_voltage_scale
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_voltage_i_scale
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_voltage_q_scale
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_voltage-voltage_scale
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/out_voltageY_scale
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/out_altvoltageY_scale
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_currentY_scale
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_currentY_supply_scale
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_current_scale
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_currentY_i_scale
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_currentY_q_scale
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_current_i_scale
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_current_q_scale
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_accel_scale
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_accel_peak_scale
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_anglvel_scale
@@ -321,7 +296,6 @@ What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_pressureY_scale
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_pressure_scale
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_humidityrelative_scale
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_velocity_sqrt(x^2+y^2+z^2)_scale
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_illuminance_scale
KernelVersion: 2.6.35
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
@@ -351,10 +325,6 @@ Description:
What /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_voltageY_calibscale
What /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_voltageY_supply_calibscale
What /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_voltageY_i_calibscale
What /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_voltageY_q_calibscale
What /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_voltage_i_calibscale
What /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_voltage_q_calibscale
What /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_voltage_calibscale
What /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_accel_x_calibscale
What /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_accel_y_calibscale
@@ -366,7 +336,6 @@ what /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_illuminance0_calibscale
what /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_proximity0_calibscale
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_pressureY_calibscale
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_pressure_calibscale
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_illuminance_calibscale
KernelVersion: 2.6.35
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
@@ -378,7 +347,7 @@ What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_activity_calibgender
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_energy_calibgender
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_distance_calibgender
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_velocity_calibgender
KernelVersion: 4.0
KernelVersion: 3.20
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
Gender of the user (e.g.: male, female) used by some pedometers
@@ -389,7 +358,7 @@ What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_activity_calibgender_available
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_energy_calibgender_available
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_distance_calibgender_available
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_velocity_calibgender_available
KernelVersion: 4.0
KernelVersion: 3.20
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
Lists all available gender values (e.g.: male, female).
@@ -406,18 +375,13 @@ Description:
type.
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_energy_calibweight
KernelVersion: 4.0
KernelVersion: 3.20
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
Weight of the user (in kg). It is needed by some pedometers
to compute the calories burnt by the user.
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_accel_scale_available
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/in_anglvel_scale_available
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/in_magn_scale_available
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/in_illuminance_scale_available
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/in_intensity_scale_available
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/in_proximity_scale_available
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/in_voltageX_scale_available
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/in_voltage-voltage_scale_available
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/out_voltageX_scale_available
@@ -452,16 +416,6 @@ Description:
to the underlying data channel, then this parameter
gives the 3dB frequency of the filter in Hz.
What: /sys/.../in_accel_filter_high_pass_3db_frequency
What: /sys/.../in_anglvel_filter_high_pass_3db_frequency
What: /sys/.../in_magn_filter_high_pass_3db_frequency
KernelVersion: 4.2
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
If a known or controllable high pass filter is applied
to the underlying data channel, then this parameter
gives the 3dB frequency of the filter in Hz.
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/out_voltageY_raw
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/out_altvoltageY_raw
KernelVersion: 2.6.37
@@ -493,7 +447,7 @@ Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
Specifies the output powerdown mode.
DAC output stage is disconnected from the amplifier and
1kohm_to_gnd: connected to ground via an 1kOhm resistor,
1kohm_to_gnd: connected to ground via an 1kOhm resistor,
6kohm_to_gnd: connected to ground via a 6kOhm resistor,
20kohm_to_gnd: connected to ground via a 20kOhm resistor,
100kohm_to_gnd: connected to ground via an 100kOhm resistor,
@@ -503,9 +457,9 @@ Description:
outX_powerdown_mode_available. If Y is not present the
mode is shared across all outputs.
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/out_voltageY_powerdown_mode_available
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/out_votlageY_powerdown_mode_available
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/out_voltage_powerdown_mode_available
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/out_altvoltageY_powerdown_mode_available
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/out_altvotlageY_powerdown_mode_available
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/out_altvoltage_powerdown_mode_available
KernelVersion: 2.6.38
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
@@ -581,7 +535,6 @@ What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/events/in_voltageY_supply_thresh_rising_en
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/events/in_voltageY_supply_thresh_falling_en
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/events/in_voltageY_thresh_rising_en
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/events/in_voltageY_thresh_falling_en
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/events/in_voltageY_thresh_either_en
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/events/in_tempY_thresh_rising_en
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/events/in_tempY_thresh_falling_en
KernelVersion: 2.6.37
@@ -659,8 +612,6 @@ Description:
a given event type is enabled a future point (and not those for
whatever event was previously enabled).
What: /sys/.../events/in_accel_thresh_rising_value
What: /sys/.../events/in_accel_thresh_falling_value
What: /sys/.../events/in_accel_x_raw_thresh_rising_value
What: /sys/.../events/in_accel_x_raw_thresh_falling_value
What: /sys/.../events/in_accel_y_raw_thresh_rising_value
@@ -710,24 +661,6 @@ Description:
value is in raw device units or in processed units (as _raw
and _input do on sysfs direct channel read attributes).
What: /sys/.../events/in_accel_scale
What: /sys/.../events/in_accel_peak_scale
What: /sys/.../events/in_anglvel_scale
What: /sys/.../events/in_magn_scale
What: /sys/.../events/in_rot_from_north_magnetic_scale
What: /sys/.../events/in_rot_from_north_true_scale
What: /sys/.../events/in_voltage_scale
What: /sys/.../events/in_voltage_supply_scale
What: /sys/.../events/in_temp_scale
What: /sys/.../events/in_illuminance_scale
What: /sys/.../events/in_proximity_scale
KernelVersion: 3.21
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
Specifies the conversion factor from the standard units
to device specific units used to set the event trigger
threshold.
What: /sys/.../events/in_accel_x_thresh_rising_hysteresis
What: /sys/.../events/in_accel_x_thresh_falling_hysteresis
What: /sys/.../events/in_accel_x_thresh_either_hysteresis
@@ -843,7 +776,7 @@ Description:
What: /sys/.../events/in_accel_x_thresh_rising_period
What: /sys/.../events/in_accel_x_thresh_falling_period
What: /sys/.../events/in_accel_x_roc_rising_period
hat: /sys/.../events/in_accel_x_roc_rising_period
What: /sys/.../events/in_accel_x_roc_falling_period
What: /sys/.../events/in_accel_y_thresh_rising_period
What: /sys/.../events/in_accel_y_thresh_falling_period
@@ -923,26 +856,6 @@ Description:
met before an event is generated. If direction is not
specified then this period applies to both directions.
What: /sys/.../events/in_accel_thresh_rising_low_pass_filter_3db
What: /sys/.../events/in_anglvel_thresh_rising_low_pass_filter_3db
What: /sys/.../events/in_magn_thresh_rising_low_pass_filter_3db
KernelVersion: 4.2
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
If a low pass filter can be applied to the event generation
this property gives its 3db frequency in Hz.
A value of zero disables the filter.
What: /sys/.../events/in_accel_thresh_rising_high_pass_filter_3db
What: /sys/.../events/in_anglvel_thresh_rising_high_pass_filter_3db
What: /sys/.../events/in_magn_thresh_rising_high_pass_filter_3db
KernelVersion: 4.2
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
If a high pass filter can be applied to the event generation
this property gives its 3db frequency in Hz.
A value of zero disables the filter.
What: /sys/.../events/in_activity_still_thresh_rising_en
What: /sys/.../events/in_activity_still_thresh_falling_en
What: /sys/.../events/in_activity_walking_thresh_rising_en
@@ -1010,7 +923,7 @@ Description:
this type.
What: /sys/.../events/in_steps_change_en
KernelVersion: 4.0
KernelVersion: 3.20
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
Event generated when channel passes a threshold on the absolute
@@ -1019,7 +932,7 @@ Description:
in_steps_change_value.
What: /sys/.../events/in_steps_change_value
KernelVersion: 4.0
KernelVersion: 3.20
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
Specifies the value of change threshold that the
@@ -1041,6 +954,13 @@ Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
Number of scans contained by the buffer.
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/buffer/bytes_per_datum
KernelVersion: 2.6.37
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
Bytes per scan. Due to alignment fun, the scan may be larger
than implied directly by the scan_element parameters.
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/buffer/enable
KernelVersion: 2.6.35
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
@@ -1072,16 +992,11 @@ What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_timestamp_en
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_voltageY_supply_en
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_voltageY_en
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_voltageY-voltageZ_en
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_voltageY_i_en
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_voltageY_q_en
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_voltage_i_en
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_voltage_q_en
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_incli_x_en
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_incli_y_en
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_pressureY_en
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_pressure_en
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_rot_quaternion_en
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_proximity_en
KernelVersion: 2.6.37
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
@@ -1094,15 +1009,10 @@ What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_incli_type
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_voltageY_type
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_voltage_type
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_voltageY_supply_type
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_voltageY_i_type
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_voltageY_q_type
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_voltage_i_type
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_voltage_q_type
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_timestamp_type
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_pressureY_type
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_pressure_type
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_rot_quaternion_type
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_proximity_type
KernelVersion: 2.6.37
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
@@ -1135,10 +1045,6 @@ Description:
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_voltageY_index
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_voltageY_supply_index
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_voltageY_i_index
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_voltageY_q_index
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_voltage_i_index
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_voltage_q_index
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_accel_x_index
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_accel_y_index
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_accel_z_index
@@ -1158,7 +1064,6 @@ What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_timestamp_index
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_pressureY_index
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_pressure_index
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_rot_quaternion_index
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_proximity_index
KernelVersion: 2.6.37
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
@@ -1199,7 +1104,7 @@ Description:
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/in_energy_input
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/in_energy_raw
KernelVersion: 4.0
KernelVersion: 3.20
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
This attribute is used to read the energy value reported by the
@@ -1208,7 +1113,7 @@ Description:
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/in_distance_input
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/in_distance_raw
KernelVersion: 4.0
KernelVersion: 3.20
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
This attribute is used to read the distance covered by the user
@@ -1233,16 +1138,14 @@ Description:
object is near the sensor, usually be observing
reflectivity of infrared or ultrasound emitted.
Often these sensors are unit less and as such conversion
to SI units is not possible. Higher proximity measurements
indicate closer objects, and vice versa.
to SI units is not possible. Where it is, the units should
be meters. If such a conversion is not possible, the reported
values should behave in the same way as a distance, i.e. lower
values indicate something is closer to the sensor.
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/in_illuminance_input
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/in_illuminance_raw
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/in_illuminanceY_input
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/in_illuminanceY_raw
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/in_illuminanceY_mean_raw
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/in_illuminance_ir_raw
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/in_illuminance_clear_raw
KernelVersion: 3.4
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
@@ -1271,7 +1174,7 @@ Description:
seconds.
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/in_velocity_sqrt(x^2+y^2+z^2)_integration_time
KernelVersion: 4.0
KernelVersion: 3.20
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
Number of seconds in which to compute speed.
@@ -1296,8 +1199,6 @@ Description:
or without compensation from tilt sensors.
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_currentX_raw
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_currentX_i_raw
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_currentX_q_raw
KernelVersion: 3.18
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
@@ -1306,11 +1207,6 @@ Description:
present, output should be considered as processed with the
unit in milliamps.
Channels with 'i' and 'q' modifiers always exist in pairs and both
channels refer to the same signal. The 'i' channel contains the in-phase
component of the signal while the 'q' channel contains the quadrature
component.
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/in_energy_en
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/in_distance_en
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/in_velocity_sqrt(x^2+y^2+z^2)_en
@@ -1340,7 +1236,7 @@ Description:
Units after application of scale are m/s.
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/in_steps_debounce_count
KernelVersion: 4.0
KernelVersion: 3.20
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
Specifies the number of steps that must occur within
@@ -1348,146 +1244,8 @@ Description:
consumer is making steps.
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/in_steps_debounce_time
KernelVersion: 4.0
KernelVersion: 3.20
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
Specifies number of seconds in which we compute the steps
that occur in order to decide if the consumer is making steps.
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/buffer/watermark
KernelVersion: 4.2
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
A single positive integer specifying the maximum number of scan
elements to wait for.
Poll will block until the watermark is reached.
Blocking read will wait until the minimum between the requested
read amount or the low water mark is available.
Non-blocking read will retrieve the available samples from the
buffer even if there are less samples then watermark level. This
allows the application to block on poll with a timeout and read
the available samples after the timeout expires and thus have a
maximum delay guarantee.
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/buffer/hwfifo_enabled
KernelVersion: 4.2
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
A read-only boolean value that indicates if the hardware fifo is
currently enabled or disabled. If the device does not have a
hardware fifo this entry is not present.
The hardware fifo is enabled when the buffer is enabled if the
current hardware fifo watermark level is set and other current
device settings allows it (e.g. if a trigger is set that samples
data differently that the hardware fifo does then hardware fifo
will not enabled).
If the hardware fifo is enabled and the level of the hardware
fifo reaches the hardware fifo watermark level the device will
flush its hardware fifo to the device buffer. Doing a non
blocking read on the device when no samples are present in the
device buffer will also force a flush.
When the hardware fifo is enabled there is no need to use a
trigger to use buffer mode since the watermark settings
guarantees that the hardware fifo is flushed to the device
buffer.
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/buffer/hwfifo_watermark
KernelVersion: 4.2
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
Read-only entry that contains a single integer specifying the
current watermark level for the hardware fifo. If the device
does not have a hardware fifo this entry is not present.
The watermark level for the hardware fifo is set by the driver
based on the value set by the user in buffer/watermark but
taking into account hardware limitations (e.g. most hardware
buffers are limited to 32-64 samples, some hardware buffers
watermarks are fixed or have minimum levels). A value of 0
means that the hardware watermark is unset.
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/buffer/hwfifo_watermark_min
KernelVersion: 4.2
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
A single positive integer specifying the minimum watermark level
for the hardware fifo of this device. If the device does not
have a hardware fifo this entry is not present.
If the user sets buffer/watermark to a value less than this one,
then the hardware watermark will remain unset.
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/buffer/hwfifo_watermark_max
KernelVersion: 4.2
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
A single positive integer specifying the maximum watermark level
for the hardware fifo of this device. If the device does not
have a hardware fifo this entry is not present.
If the user sets buffer/watermark to a value greater than this
one, then the hardware watermark will be capped at this value.
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/buffer/hwfifo_watermark_available
KernelVersion: 4.2
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
A list of positive integers specifying the available watermark
levels for the hardware fifo. This entry is optional and if it
is not present it means that all the values between
hwfifo_watermark_min and hwfifo_watermark_max are supported.
If the user sets buffer/watermark to a value greater than
hwfifo_watermak_min but not equal to any of the values in this
list, the driver will chose an appropriate value for the
hardware fifo watermark level.
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_temp_calibemissivity
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_tempX_calibemissivity
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_temp_object_calibemissivity
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_tempX_object_calibemissivity
KernelVersion: 4.1
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
The emissivity ratio of the surface in the field of view of the
contactless temperature sensor. Emissivity varies from 0 to 1,
with 1 being the emissivity of a black body.
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_magn_x_oversampling_ratio
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_magn_y_oversampling_ratio
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_magn_z_oversampling_ratio
KernelVersion: 4.2
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
Hardware applied number of measurements for acquiring one
data point. The HW will do <type>[_name]_oversampling_ratio
measurements and return the average value as output data. Each
value resulted from <type>[_name]_oversampling_ratio measurements
is considered as one sample for <type>[_name]_sampling_frequency.
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_concentration_raw
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_concentrationX_raw
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_concentration_co2_raw
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_concentrationX_co2_raw
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_concentration_voc_raw
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_concentrationX_voc_raw
KernelVersion: 4.3
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
Raw (unscaled no offset etc.) percentage reading of a substance.
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_resistance_raw
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_resistanceX_raw
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/out_resistance_raw
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/out_resistanceX_raw
KernelVersion: 4.3
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
Raw (unscaled no offset etc.) resistance reading that can be processed
into an ohm value.
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/heater_enable
KernelVersion: 4.1.0
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
'1' (enable) or '0' (disable) specifying the enable
of heater function. Same reading values apply
This ABI is especially applicable for humidity sensors
to heatup the device and get rid of any condensation
in some humidity environment

View File

@@ -1,43 +0,0 @@
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_voltageY_sensing_mode
Date: August 2015
KernelVersion: 4.2.0
Contact: source@cogentembedded.com
Description:
Program sensor type for threshold detector inputs.
Could be either "GND-Open" or "Supply-Open" mode. Y is a
threshold detector input channel. Channels 0..7, 8..15, 16..23
and 24..31 has common sensor types.
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/events/in_voltageY_thresh_falling_value
Date: August 2015
KernelVersion: 4.2.0
Contact: source@cogentembedded.com
Description:
Channel Y low voltage threshold. If sensor input voltage goes lower then
this value then the threshold falling event is pushed.
Depending on in_voltageY_sensing_mode the low voltage threshold
is separately set for "GND-Open" and "Supply-Open" modes.
Channels 0..31 have common low threshold values, but could have different
sensing_modes.
The low voltage threshold range is between 2..21V.
Hysteresis between low and high thresholds can not be lower then 2 and
can not be odd.
If falling threshold results hysteresis to odd value then rising
threshold is automatically subtracted by one.
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/events/in_voltageY_thresh_rising_value
Date: August 2015
KernelVersion: 4.2.0
Contact: source@cogentembedded.com
Description:
Channel Y high voltage threshold. If sensor input voltage goes higher then
this value then the threshold rising event is pushed.
Depending on in_voltageY_sensing_mode the high voltage threshold
is separately set for "GND-Open" and "Supply-Open" modes.
Channels 0..31 have common high threshold values, but could have different
sensing_modes.
The high voltage threshold range is between 3..22V.
Hysteresis between low and high thresholds can not be lower then 2 and
can not be odd.
If rising threshold results hysteresis to odd value then falling
threshold is automatically appended by one.

View File

@@ -1,7 +0,0 @@
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_concentration_VOC_short_raw
Date: September 2015
KernelVersion: 4.3
Contact: Matt Ranostay <mranostay@gmail.com>
Description:
Get the raw calibration VOC value from the sensor.
This value has little application outside of calibration.

View File

@@ -1,9 +0,0 @@
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/out_current_heater_raw
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/out_current_heater_raw_available
KernelVersion: 4.3
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
Controls the heater device within the humidity sensor to get
rid of excess condensation.
Valid control values are 0 = OFF, and 1 = ON.

View File

@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/battery_low
KernelVersion: 4.1.0
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
Reading returns either '1' or '0'. '1' means that the
battery level supplied to sensor is below 2.25V.
This ABI is available for tsys02d, htu21, ms8607
This ABI is available for htu21, ms8607

View File

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
What /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_proximity_input
What /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_proximity_raw
Date: March 2014
KernelVersion: 3.15
Contact: Matt Ranostay <mranostay@gmail.com>

View File

@@ -9,34 +9,3 @@ Description:
automated testing or in situations, where other trigger methods
are not applicable. For example no RTC or spare GPIOs.
X is the IIO index of the trigger.
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/triggerX/name
KernelVersion: 2.6.39
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
The name attribute holds a description string for the current
trigger. In order to associate the trigger with an IIO device
one should write this name string to
/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceY/trigger/current_trigger.
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio_sysfs_trigger/add_trigger
KernelVersion: 2.6.39
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
This attribute is provided by the iio-trig-sysfs stand-alone
driver and it is used to activate the creation of a new trigger.
In order to achieve this, one should write a positive integer
into the associated file, which will serve as the id of the
trigger. If the trigger with the specified id is already present
in the system, an invalid argument message will be returned.
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio_sysfs_trigger/remove_trigger
KernelVersion: 2.6.39
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
This attribute is used to unregister and delete a previously
created trigger from the list of available triggers. In order to
achieve this, one should write a positive integer into the
associated file, representing the id of the trigger that needs
to be removed. If the trigger can't be found, an invalid
argument message will be returned to the user.

View File

@@ -1,7 +0,0 @@
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/conversion_mode
KernelVersion: 4.2
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
Specifies the hardware conversion mode used. The three
available modes are "normal", "high-speed" and "low-power",
where the last is the default mode.

View File

@@ -1,49 +0,0 @@
What: /sys/bus/intel_th/devices/<intel_th_id>-gth/masters/*
Date: June 2015
KernelVersion: 4.3
Contact: Alexander Shishkin <alexander.shishkin@linux.intel.com>
Description: (RW) Configure output ports for STP masters. Writing -1
disables a master; any
What: /sys/bus/intel_th/devices/<intel_th_id>-gth/outputs/[0-7]_port
Date: June 2015
KernelVersion: 4.3
Contact: Alexander Shishkin <alexander.shishkin@linux.intel.com>
Description: (RO) Output port type:
0: not present,
1: MSU (Memory Storage Unit)
2: CTP (Common Trace Port)
4: PTI (MIPI PTI).
What: /sys/bus/intel_th/devices/<intel_th_id>-gth/outputs/[0-7]_drop
Date: June 2015
KernelVersion: 4.3
Contact: Alexander Shishkin <alexander.shishkin@linux.intel.com>
Description: (RW) Data retention policy setting: keep (0) or drop (1)
incoming data while output port is in reset.
What: /sys/bus/intel_th/devices/<intel_th_id>-gth/outputs/[0-7]_null
Date: June 2015
KernelVersion: 4.3
Contact: Alexander Shishkin <alexander.shishkin@linux.intel.com>
Description: (RW) STP NULL packet generation: enabled (1) or disabled (0).
What: /sys/bus/intel_th/devices/<intel_th_id>-gth/outputs/[0-7]_flush
Date: June 2015
KernelVersion: 4.3
Contact: Alexander Shishkin <alexander.shishkin@linux.intel.com>
Description: (RW) Force flush data from byte packing buffer for the output
port.
What: /sys/bus/intel_th/devices/<intel_th_id>-gth/outputs/[0-7]_reset
Date: June 2015
KernelVersion: 4.3
Contact: Alexander Shishkin <alexander.shishkin@linux.intel.com>
Description: (RO) Output port is in reset (1).
What: /sys/bus/intel_th/devices/<intel_th_id>-gth/outputs/[0-7]_smcfreq
Date: June 2015
KernelVersion: 4.3
Contact: Alexander Shishkin <alexander.shishkin@linux.intel.com>
Description: (RW) STP sync packet frequency for the port. Specifies the
number of clocks between mainenance packets.

View File

@@ -1,33 +0,0 @@
What: /sys/bus/intel_th/devices/<intel_th_id>-msc<msc-id>/wrap
Date: June 2015
KernelVersion: 4.3
Contact: Alexander Shishkin <alexander.shishkin@linux.intel.com>
Description: (RW) Configure MSC buffer wrapping. 1 == wrapping enabled.
What: /sys/bus/intel_th/devices/<intel_th_id>-msc<msc-id>/mode
Date: June 2015
KernelVersion: 4.3
Contact: Alexander Shishkin <alexander.shishkin@linux.intel.com>
Description: (RW) Configure MSC operating mode:
- "single", for contiguous buffer mode (high-order alloc);
- "multi", for multiblock mode;
- "ExI", for DCI handler mode;
- "debug", for debug mode.
If operating mode changes, existing buffer is deallocated,
provided there are no active users and tracing is not enabled,
otherwise the write will fail.
What: /sys/bus/intel_th/devices/<intel_th_id>-msc<msc-id>/nr_pages
Date: June 2015
KernelVersion: 4.3
Contact: Alexander Shishkin <alexander.shishkin@linux.intel.com>
Description: (RW) Configure MSC buffer size for "single" or "multi" modes.
In single mode, this is a single number of pages, has to be
power of 2. In multiblock mode, this is a comma-separated list
of numbers of pages for each window to be allocated. Number of
windows is not limited.
Writing to this file deallocates existing buffer (provided
there are no active users and tracing is not enabled) and then
allocates a new one.

View File

@@ -1,24 +0,0 @@
What: /sys/bus/intel_th/devices/<intel_th_id>-pti/mode
Date: June 2015
KernelVersion: 4.3
Contact: Alexander Shishkin <alexander.shishkin@linux.intel.com>
Description: (RW) Configure PTI output width. Currently supported values
are 4, 8, 12, 16.
What: /sys/bus/intel_th/devices/<intel_th_id>-pti/freerunning_clock
Date: June 2015
KernelVersion: 4.3
Contact: Alexander Shishkin <alexander.shishkin@linux.intel.com>
Description: (RW) 0: PTI trace clock acts as a strobe which only toggles
when there is trace data to send. 1: PTI trace clock is a
free-running clock.
What: /sys/bus/intel_th/devices/<intel_th_id>-pti/clock_divider
Date: June 2015
KernelVersion: 4.3
Contact: Alexander Shishkin <alexander.shishkin@linux.intel.com>
Description: (RW) Configure PTI port clock divider:
- 0: Intel TH clock rate,
- 1: 1/2 Intel TH clock rate,
- 2: 1/4 Intel TH clock rate,
- 3: 1/8 Intel TH clock rate.

View File

@@ -1,13 +0,0 @@
What: /sys/bus/intel_th/devices/<intel_th_id>-<device><id>/active
Date: June 2015
KernelVersion: 4.3
Contact: Alexander Shishkin <alexander.shishkin@linux.intel.com>
Description: (RW) Writes of 1 or 0 enable or disable trace output to this
output device. Reads return current status.
What: /sys/bus/intel_th/devices/<intel_th_id>-msc<msc-id>/port
Date: June 2015
KernelVersion: 4.3
Contact: Alexander Shishkin <alexander.shishkin@linux.intel.com>
Description: (RO) Port number, corresponding to this output device on the
switch (GTH).

View File

@@ -4,25 +4,4 @@ KernelVersion: 3.10
Contact: Samuel Ortiz <sameo@linux.intel.com>
linux-mei@linux.intel.com
Description: Stores the same MODALIAS value emitted by uevent
Format: mei:<mei device name>:<device uuid>:
What: /sys/bus/mei/devices/.../name
Date: May 2015
KernelVersion: 4.2
Contact: Tomas Winkler <tomas.winkler@intel.com>
Description: Stores mei client device name
Format: string
What: /sys/bus/mei/devices/.../uuid
Date: May 2015
KernelVersion: 4.2
Contact: Tomas Winkler <tomas.winkler@intel.com>
Description: Stores mei client device uuid
Format: xxxxxxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxxxxxxxxxx
What: /sys/bus/mei/devices/.../version
Date: Aug 2015
KernelVersion: 4.3
Contact: Tomas Winkler <tomas.winkler@intel.com>
Description: Stores mei client protocol version
Format: %d
Format: mei:<mei device name>

View File

@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
What: /sys/bus/pci/drivers/janz-cmodio/.../modulbus_number
Date: May 2010
KernelVersion: 2.6.35
Contact: Ira W. Snyder <ira.snyder@gmail.com>
Description:
Value representing the HEX switch S2 of the janz carrier board CMOD-IO or CAN-PCI2
Read-only: value of the configuration switch (0..15)

View File

@@ -1,23 +1,3 @@
What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/INTERFACE/authorized
Date: August 2015
Description:
This allows to authorize (1) or deauthorize (0)
individual interfaces instead a whole device
in contrast to the device authorization.
If a deauthorized interface will be authorized
so the driver probing must be triggered manually
by writing INTERFACE to /sys/bus/usb/drivers_probe
This allows to avoid side-effects with drivers
that need multiple interfaces.
A deauthorized interface cannot be probed or claimed.
What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/usbX/interface_authorized_default
Date: August 2015
Description:
This is used as value that determines if interfaces
would be authorized by default.
The value can be 1 or 0. It's by default 1.
What: /sys/bus/usb/device/.../authorized
Date: July 2008
KernelVersion: 2.6.26
@@ -134,22 +114,6 @@ Description:
enabled for the device. Developer can write y/Y/1 or n/N/0 to
the file to enable/disable the feature.
What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/.../power/usb3_hardware_lpm_u1
/sys/bus/usb/devices/.../power/usb3_hardware_lpm_u2
Date: November 2015
Contact: Kevin Strasser <kevin.strasser@linux.intel.com>
Lu Baolu <baolu.lu@linux.intel.com>
Description:
If CONFIG_PM is set and a USB 3.0 lpm-capable device is plugged
in to a xHCI host which supports link PM, it will check if U1
and U2 exit latencies have been set in the BOS descriptor; if
the check is passed and the host supports USB3 hardware LPM,
USB3 hardware LPM will be enabled for the device and the USB
device directory will contain two files named
power/usb3_hardware_lpm_u1 and power/usb3_hardware_lpm_u2. These
files hold a string value (enable or disable) indicating whether
or not USB3 hardware LPM U1 or U2 is enabled for the device.
What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/.../removable
Date: February 2012
Contact: Matthew Garrett <mjg@redhat.com>

View File

@@ -4,14 +4,14 @@ driver is bound with root hub device.
What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/.../get_dev_desc
Date: March 2014
Contact: Pratyush Anand <pratyush.anand@gmail.com>
Contact: Pratyush Anand <pratyush.anand@st.com>
Description:
Write to this node to issue "Get Device Descriptor"
for Link Layer Validation device. It is needed for TD.7.06.
What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/.../u1_timeout
Date: March 2014
Contact: Pratyush Anand <pratyush.anand@gmail.com>
Contact: Pratyush Anand <pratyush.anand@st.com>
Description:
Set "U1 timeout" for the downstream port where Link Layer
Validation device is connected. Timeout value must be between 0
@@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ Description:
What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/.../u2_timeout
Date: March 2014
Contact: Pratyush Anand <pratyush.anand@gmail.com>
Contact: Pratyush Anand <pratyush.anand@st.com>
Description:
Set "U2 timeout" for the downstream port where Link Layer
Validation device is connected. Timeout value must be between 0
@@ -27,21 +27,21 @@ Description:
What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/.../hot_reset
Date: March 2014
Contact: Pratyush Anand <pratyush.anand@gmail.com>
Contact: Pratyush Anand <pratyush.anand@st.com>
Description:
Write to this node to issue "Reset" for Link Layer Validation
device. It is needed for TD.7.29, TD.7.31, TD.7.34 and TD.7.35.
What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/.../u3_entry
Date: March 2014
Contact: Pratyush Anand <pratyush.anand@gmail.com>
Contact: Pratyush Anand <pratyush.anand@st.com>
Description:
Write to this node to issue "U3 entry" for Link Layer
Validation device. It is needed for TD.7.35 and TD.7.36.
What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/.../u3_exit
Date: March 2014
Contact: Pratyush Anand <pratyush.anand@gmail.com>
Contact: Pratyush Anand <pratyush.anand@st.com>
Description:
Write to this node to issue "U3 exit" for Link Layer
Validation device. It is needed for TD.7.36.

View File

@@ -6,17 +6,6 @@ Example: The real path of the attribute /sys/class/cxl/afu0.0s/irqs_max is
Slave contexts (eg. /sys/class/cxl/afu0.0s):
What: /sys/class/cxl/<afu>/afu_err_buf
Date: September 2014
Contact: linuxppc-dev@lists.ozlabs.org
Description: read only
AFU Error Buffer contents. The contents of this file are
application specific and depends on the AFU being used.
Applications interacting with the AFU can use this attribute
to know about the current error condition and take appropriate
action like logging the event etc.
What: /sys/class/cxl/<afu>/irqs_max
Date: September 2014
Contact: linuxppc-dev@lists.ozlabs.org
@@ -26,7 +15,6 @@ Description: read/write
that hardware can support (eg. 2037). Write values will limit
userspace applications to that many userspace interrupts. Must
be >= irqs_min.
Users: https://github.com/ibm-capi/libcxl
What: /sys/class/cxl/<afu>/irqs_min
Date: September 2014
@@ -36,7 +24,6 @@ Description: read only
userspace must request on a CXL_START_WORK ioctl. Userspace may
omit the num_interrupts field in the START_WORK IOCTL to get
this minimum automatically.
Users: https://github.com/ibm-capi/libcxl
What: /sys/class/cxl/<afu>/mmio_size
Date: September 2014
@@ -44,7 +31,6 @@ Contact: linuxppc-dev@lists.ozlabs.org
Description: read only
Decimal value of the size of the MMIO space that may be mmaped
by userspace.
Users: https://github.com/ibm-capi/libcxl
What: /sys/class/cxl/<afu>/modes_supported
Date: September 2014
@@ -52,7 +38,6 @@ Contact: linuxppc-dev@lists.ozlabs.org
Description: read only
List of the modes this AFU supports. One per line.
Valid entries are: "dedicated_process" and "afu_directed"
Users: https://github.com/ibm-capi/libcxl
What: /sys/class/cxl/<afu>/mode
Date: September 2014
@@ -61,7 +46,6 @@ Description: read/write
The current mode the AFU is using. Will be one of the modes
given in modes_supported. Writing will change the mode
provided that no user contexts are attached.
Users: https://github.com/ibm-capi/libcxl
What: /sys/class/cxl/<afu>/prefault_mode
@@ -75,7 +59,6 @@ Description: read/write
descriptor as an effective address and
prefault what it points to.
all: all segments process calling START_WORK maps.
Users: https://github.com/ibm-capi/libcxl
What: /sys/class/cxl/<afu>/reset
Date: September 2014
@@ -83,14 +66,12 @@ Contact: linuxppc-dev@lists.ozlabs.org
Description: write only
Writing 1 here will reset the AFU provided there are not
contexts active on the AFU.
Users: https://github.com/ibm-capi/libcxl
What: /sys/class/cxl/<afu>/api_version
Date: September 2014
Contact: linuxppc-dev@lists.ozlabs.org
Description: read only
Decimal value of the current version of the kernel/user API.
Users: https://github.com/ibm-capi/libcxl
What: /sys/class/cxl/<afu>/api_version_compatible
Date: September 2014
@@ -98,7 +79,6 @@ Contact: linuxppc-dev@lists.ozlabs.org
Description: read only
Decimal value of the the lowest version of the userspace API
this this kernel supports.
Users: https://github.com/ibm-capi/libcxl
AFU configuration records (eg. /sys/class/cxl/afu0.0/cr0):
@@ -112,7 +92,6 @@ Contact: linuxppc-dev@lists.ozlabs.org
Description: read only
Hexadecimal value of the vendor ID found in this AFU
configuration record.
Users: https://github.com/ibm-capi/libcxl
What: /sys/class/cxl/<afu>/cr<config num>/device
Date: February 2015
@@ -120,15 +99,13 @@ Contact: linuxppc-dev@lists.ozlabs.org
Description: read only
Hexadecimal value of the device ID found in this AFU
configuration record.
Users: https://github.com/ibm-capi/libcxl
What: /sys/class/cxl/<afu>/cr<config num>/class
What: /sys/class/cxl/<afu>/cr<config num>/vendor
Date: February 2015
Contact: linuxppc-dev@lists.ozlabs.org
Description: read only
Hexadecimal value of the class code found in this AFU
configuration record.
Users: https://github.com/ibm-capi/libcxl
What: /sys/class/cxl/<afu>/cr<config num>/config
Date: February 2015
@@ -138,7 +115,6 @@ Description: read only
record. The format is expected to match the either the standard
or extended configuration space defined by the PCIe
specification.
Users: https://github.com/ibm-capi/libcxl
@@ -150,21 +126,18 @@ Contact: linuxppc-dev@lists.ozlabs.org
Description: read only
Decimal value of the size of the MMIO space that may be mmaped
by userspace. This includes all slave contexts space also.
Users: https://github.com/ibm-capi/libcxl
What: /sys/class/cxl/<afu>m/pp_mmio_len
Date: September 2014
Contact: linuxppc-dev@lists.ozlabs.org
Description: read only
Decimal value of the Per Process MMIO space length.
Users: https://github.com/ibm-capi/libcxl
What: /sys/class/cxl/<afu>m/pp_mmio_off
Date: September 2014
Contact: linuxppc-dev@lists.ozlabs.org
Description: read only
Decimal value of the Per Process MMIO space offset.
Users: https://github.com/ibm-capi/libcxl
Card info (eg. /sys/class/cxl/card0)
@@ -174,14 +147,12 @@ Date: September 2014
Contact: linuxppc-dev@lists.ozlabs.org
Description: read only
Identifies the CAIA Version the card implements.
Users: https://github.com/ibm-capi/libcxl
What: /sys/class/cxl/<card>/psl_revision
Date: September 2014
Contact: linuxppc-dev@lists.ozlabs.org
Description: read only
Identifies the revision level of the PSL.
Users: https://github.com/ibm-capi/libcxl
What: /sys/class/cxl/<card>/base_image
Date: September 2014
@@ -191,7 +162,6 @@ Description: read only
that support loadable PSLs. For FPGAs this field identifies
the image contained in the on-adapter flash which is loaded
during the initial program load.
Users: https://github.com/ibm-capi/libcxl
What: /sys/class/cxl/<card>/image_loaded
Date: September 2014
@@ -199,7 +169,6 @@ Contact: linuxppc-dev@lists.ozlabs.org
Description: read only
Will return "user" or "factory" depending on the image loaded
onto the card.
Users: https://github.com/ibm-capi/libcxl
What: /sys/class/cxl/<card>/load_image_on_perst
Date: December 2014
@@ -214,7 +183,6 @@ Description: read/write
user or factory image to be loaded.
Default is to reload on PERST whichever image the card has
loaded.
Users: https://github.com/ibm-capi/libcxl
What: /sys/class/cxl/<card>/reset
Date: October 2014
@@ -222,14 +190,3 @@ Contact: linuxppc-dev@lists.ozlabs.org
Description: write only
Writing 1 will issue a PERST to card which may cause the card
to reload the FPGA depending on load_image_on_perst.
Users: https://github.com/ibm-capi/libcxl
What: /sys/class/cxl/<card>/perst_reloads_same_image
Date: July 2015
Contact: linuxppc-dev@lists.ozlabs.org
Description: read/write
Trust that when an image is reloaded via PERST, it will not
have changed.
0 = don't trust, the image may be different (default)
1 = trust that the image will not change.
Users: https://github.com/ibm-capi/libcxl

View File

@@ -1,37 +0,0 @@
What: /sys/class/fpga_manager/<fpga>/name
Date: August 2015
KernelVersion: 4.3
Contact: Alan Tull <atull@opensource.altera.com>
Description: Name of low level fpga manager driver.
What: /sys/class/fpga_manager/<fpga>/state
Date: August 2015
KernelVersion: 4.3
Contact: Alan Tull <atull@opensource.altera.com>
Description: Read fpga manager state as a string.
The intent is to provide enough detail that if something goes
wrong during FPGA programming (something that the driver can't
fix) then userspace can know, i.e. if the firmware request
fails, that could be due to not being able to find the firmware
file.
This is a superset of FPGA states and fpga manager driver
states. The fpga manager driver is walking through these steps
to get the FPGA into a known operating state. It's a sequence,
though some steps may get skipped. Valid FPGA states will vary
by manufacturer; this is a superset.
* unknown = can't determine state
* power off = FPGA power is off
* power up = FPGA reports power is up
* reset = FPGA held in reset state
* firmware request = firmware class request in progress
* firmware request error = firmware request failed
* write init = preparing FPGA for programming
* write init error = Error while preparing FPGA for
programming
* write = FPGA ready to receive image data
* write error = Error while programming
* write complete = Doing post programming steps
* write complete error = Error while doing post programming
* operating = FPGA is programmed and operating

View File

@@ -1,80 +0,0 @@
What: /sys/class/leds/<led>/flash_brightness
Date: March 2015
KernelVersion: 4.0
Contact: Jacek Anaszewski <j.anaszewski@samsung.com>
Description: read/write
Set the brightness of this LED in the flash strobe mode, in
microamperes. The file is created only for the flash LED devices
that support setting flash brightness.
The value is between 0 and
/sys/class/leds/<led>/max_flash_brightness.
What: /sys/class/leds/<led>/max_flash_brightness
Date: March 2015
KernelVersion: 4.0
Contact: Jacek Anaszewski <j.anaszewski@samsung.com>
Description: read only
Maximum brightness level for this LED in the flash strobe mode,
in microamperes.
What: /sys/class/leds/<led>/flash_timeout
Date: March 2015
KernelVersion: 4.0
Contact: Jacek Anaszewski <j.anaszewski@samsung.com>
Description: read/write
Hardware timeout for flash, in microseconds. The flash strobe
is stopped after this period of time has passed from the start
of the strobe. The file is created only for the flash LED
devices that support setting flash timeout.
What: /sys/class/leds/<led>/max_flash_timeout
Date: March 2015
KernelVersion: 4.0
Contact: Jacek Anaszewski <j.anaszewski@samsung.com>
Description: read only
Maximum flash timeout for this LED, in microseconds.
What: /sys/class/leds/<led>/flash_strobe
Date: March 2015
KernelVersion: 4.0
Contact: Jacek Anaszewski <j.anaszewski@samsung.com>
Description: read/write
Flash strobe state. When written with 1 it triggers flash strobe
and when written with 0 it turns the flash off.
On read 1 means that flash is currently strobing and 0 means
that flash is off.
What: /sys/class/leds/<led>/flash_fault
Date: March 2015
KernelVersion: 4.0
Contact: Jacek Anaszewski <j.anaszewski@samsung.com>
Description: read only
Space separated list of flash faults that may have occurred.
Flash faults are re-read after strobing the flash. Possible
flash faults:
* led-over-voltage - flash controller voltage to the flash LED
has exceeded the limit specific to the flash controller
* flash-timeout-exceeded - the flash strobe was still on when
the timeout set by the user has expired; not all flash
controllers may set this in all such conditions
* controller-over-temperature - the flash controller has
overheated
* controller-short-circuit - the short circuit protection
of the flash controller has been triggered
* led-power-supply-over-current - current in the LED power
supply has exceeded the limit specific to the flash
controller
* indicator-led-fault - the flash controller has detected
a short or open circuit condition on the indicator LED
* led-under-voltage - flash controller voltage to the flash
LED has been below the minimum limit specific to
the flash
* controller-under-voltage - the input voltage of the flash
controller is below the limit under which strobing the
flash at full current will not be possible;
the condition persists until this flag is no longer set
* led-over-temperature - the temperature of the LED has exceeded
its allowed upper limit

View File

@@ -41,15 +41,18 @@ Description:
When read, this entry provides the current state of an Intel
MIC device in the context of the card OS. Possible values that
will be read are:
"ready" - The MIC device is ready to boot the card OS. On
"offline" - The MIC device is ready to boot the card OS. On
reading this entry after an OSPM resume, a "boot" has to be
written to this entry if the card was previously shutdown
during OSPM suspend.
"booting" - The MIC device has initiated booting a card OS.
"online" - The MIC device has completed boot and is online
"online" - The MIC device has initiated booting a card OS.
"shutting_down" - The card OS is shutting down.
"resetting" - A reset has been initiated for the MIC device
"reset_failed" - The MIC device has failed to reset.
"suspending" - The MIC device is currently being prepared for
suspend. On reading this entry, a "suspend" has to be written
to the state sysfs entry to ensure the card is shutdown during
OSPM suspend.
"suspended" - The MIC device has been suspended.
When written, this sysfs entry triggers different state change
operations depending upon the current state of the card OS.
@@ -59,6 +62,8 @@ Description:
sysfs entries.
"reset" - Initiates device reset.
"shutdown" - Initiates card OS shutdown.
"suspend" - Initiates card OS shutdown and also marks the card
as suspended.
What: /sys/class/mic/mic(x)/shutdown_status
Date: October 2013
@@ -121,7 +126,7 @@ Description:
the card. This sysfs entry can be written with the following
valid strings:
a) linux - Boot a Linux image.
b) flash - Boot an image for flash updates.
b) elf - Boot an elf image for flash updates.
What: /sys/class/mic/mic(x)/log_buf_addr
Date: October 2013
@@ -150,17 +155,3 @@ Description:
daemon to set the log buffer length address. The correct log
buffer length address to be written can be found in the
System.map file of the card OS.
What: /sys/class/mic/mic(x)/heartbeat_enable
Date: March 2015
KernelVersion: 3.20
Contact: Ashutosh Dixit <ashutosh.dixit@intel.com>
Description:
The MIC drivers detect and inform user space about card crashes
via a heartbeat mechanism (see the description of
shutdown_status above). User space can turn off this
notification by setting heartbeat_enable to 0 and enable it by
setting this entry to 1. If this notification is disabled it is
the responsibility of user space to detect card crashes via
alternative means such as a network ping. This setting is
enabled by default.

View File

@@ -222,13 +222,3 @@ Description:
The number of blocks that are marked as reserved, if any, in
this partition. These are typically used to store the in-flash
bad block table (BBT).
What: /sys/class/mtd/mtdX/offset
Date: March 2015
KernelVersion: 4.1
Contact: linux-mtd@lists.infradead.org
Description:
For a partition, the offset of that partition from the start
of the master device in bytes. This attribute is absent on
main devices, so it can be used to distinguish between
partitions and devices that aren't partitions.

View File

@@ -39,25 +39,6 @@ Description:
Format is a string, e.g: 00:11:22:33:44:55 for an Ethernet MAC
address.
What: /sys/class/net/<bridge iface>/bridge/group_fwd_mask
Date: January 2012
KernelVersion: 3.2
Contact: netdev@vger.kernel.org
Description:
Bitmask to allow forwarding of link local frames with address
01-80-C2-00-00-0X on a bridge device. Only values that set bits
not matching BR_GROUPFWD_RESTRICTED in net/bridge/br_private.h
allowed.
Default value 0 does not forward any link local frames.
Restricted bits:
0: 01-80-C2-00-00-00 Bridge Group Address used for STP
1: 01-80-C2-00-00-01 (MAC Control) 802.3 used for MAC PAUSE
2: 01-80-C2-00-00-02 (Link Aggregation) 802.3ad
Any values not setting these bits can be used. Take special
care when forwarding control frames e.g. 802.1X-PAE or LLDP.
What: /sys/class/net/<iface>/broadcast
Date: April 2005
KernelVersion: 2.6.12
@@ -207,14 +188,6 @@ Description:
Indicates the interface unique physical port identifier within
the NIC, as a string.
What: /sys/class/net/<iface>/phys_port_name
Date: March 2015
KernelVersion: 4.0
Contact: netdev@vger.kernel.org
Description:
Indicates the interface physical port name within the NIC,
as a string.
What: /sys/class/net/<iface>/speed
Date: October 2009
KernelVersion: 2.6.33

View File

@@ -1,19 +0,0 @@
What: /sys/class/net/<iface>/termination
Date: May 2010
KernelVersion: 2.6.35
Contact: Ira W. Snyder <ira.snyder@gmail.com>
Description:
Value representing the can bus termination
Default: 1 (termination active)
Reading: get actual termination state
Writing: set actual termination state (0=no termination, 1=termination active)
What: /sys/class/net/<iface>/fwinfo
Date: May 2015
KernelVersion: 3.19
Contact: Andreas Gröger <andreas24groeger@gmail.com>
Description:
Firmware stamp of ican3 module
Read-only: 32 byte string identification of the ICAN3 module
(known values: "JANZ-ICAN3 ICANOS 1.xx", "JANZ-ICAN3 CAL/CANopen 1.xx")

View File

@@ -24,14 +24,6 @@ Description:
Indicates the number of transmit timeout events seen by this
network interface transmit queue.
What: /sys/class/<iface>/queues/tx-<queue>/tx_maxrate
Date: March 2015
KernelVersion: 4.1
Contact: netdev@vger.kernel.org
Description:
A Mbps max-rate set for the queue, a value of zero means disabled,
default is disabled.
What: /sys/class/<iface>/queues/tx-<queue>/xps_cpus
Date: November 2010
KernelVersion: 2.6.38

View File

@@ -74,61 +74,3 @@ Description:
Valid values:
- 0 - 70 (minutes), step by 10 (rounded down)
What: /sys/class/power_supply/bq24257-charger/ovp_voltage
Date: October 2015
KernelVersion: 4.4.0
Contact: Andreas Dannenberg <dannenberg@ti.com>
Description:
This entry configures the overvoltage protection feature of bq24257-
type charger devices. This feature protects the device and other
components against damage from overvoltage on the input supply. See
device datasheet for details.
Valid values:
- 6000000, 6500000, 7000000, 8000000, 9000000, 9500000, 10000000,
10500000 (all uV)
What: /sys/class/power_supply/bq24257-charger/in_dpm_voltage
Date: October 2015
KernelVersion: 4.4.0
Contact: Andreas Dannenberg <dannenberg@ti.com>
Description:
This entry configures the input dynamic power path management voltage of
bq24257-type charger devices. Once the supply drops to the configured
voltage, the input current limit is reduced down to prevent the further
drop of the supply. When the IC enters this mode, the charge current is
lower than the set value. See device datasheet for details.
Valid values:
- 4200000, 4280000, 4360000, 4440000, 4520000, 4600000, 4680000,
4760000 (all uV)
What: /sys/class/power_supply/bq24257-charger/high_impedance_enable
Date: October 2015
KernelVersion: 4.4.0
Contact: Andreas Dannenberg <dannenberg@ti.com>
Description:
This entry allows enabling the high-impedance mode of bq24257-type
charger devices. If enabled, it places the charger IC into low power
standby mode with the switch mode controller disabled. When disabled,
the charger operates normally. See device datasheet for details.
Valid values:
- 1: enabled
- 0: disabled
What: /sys/class/power_supply/bq24257-charger/sysoff_enable
Date: October 2015
KernelVersion: 4.4.0
Contact: Andreas Dannenberg <dannenberg@ti.com>
Description:
This entry allows enabling the sysoff mode of bq24257-type charger
devices. If enabled and the input is removed, the internal battery FET
is turned off in order to reduce the leakage from the BAT pin to less
than 1uA. Note that on some devices/systems this disconnects the battery
from the system. See device datasheet for details.
Valid values:
- 1: enabled
- 0: disabled

View File

@@ -1,45 +0,0 @@
What: /sys/class/power_supply/twl4030_ac/max_current
/sys/class/power_supply/twl4030_usb/max_current
Description:
Read/Write limit on current which may
be drawn from the ac (Accessory Charger) or
USB port.
Value is in micro-Amps.
Value is set automatically to an appropriate
value when a cable is plugged or unplugged.
Value can the set by writing to the attribute.
The change will only persist until the next
plug event. These event are reported via udev.
What: /sys/class/power_supply/twl4030_usb/mode
Description:
Changing mode for USB port.
Writing to this can disable charging.
Possible values are:
"auto" - draw power as appropriate for detected
power source and battery status.
"off" - do not draw any power.
"continuous"
- activate mode described as "linear" in
TWL data sheets. This uses whatever
current is available and doesn't switch off
when voltage drops.
This is useful for unstable power sources
such as bicycle dynamo, but care should
be taken that battery is not over-charged.
What: /sys/class/power_supply/twl4030_ac/mode
Description:
Changing mode for 'ac' port.
Writing to this can disable charging.
Possible values are:
"auto" - draw power as appropriate for detected
power source and battery status.
"off" - do not draw any power.

View File

@@ -1,109 +0,0 @@
What: /sys/class/scsi_tape/*/stats/in_flight
Date: Apr 2015
KernelVersion: 4.2
Contact: Shane Seymour <shane.seymour@hp.com>
Description:
Show the number of I/Os currently in-flight between the st
module and the SCSI mid-layer.
Users:
What: /sys/class/scsi_tape/*/stats/io_ns
Date: Apr 2015
KernelVersion: 4.2
Contact: Shane Seymour <shane.seymour@hp.com>
Description:
Shows the total amount of time spent waiting for all I/O
to and from the tape drive to complete. This includes all
reads, writes, and other SCSI commands issued to the tape
drive. An example of other SCSI commands would be tape
movement such as a rewind when a rewind tape device is
closed. This item is measured in nanoseconds.
To determine the amount of time spent waiting for other I/O
to complete subtract read_ns and write_ns from this value.
Users:
What: /sys/class/scsi_tape/*/stats/other_cnt
Date: Apr 2015
KernelVersion: 4.2
Contact: Shane Seymour <shane.seymour@hp.com>
Description:
The number of I/O requests issued to the tape drive other
than SCSI read/write requests.
Users:
What: /sys/class/scsi_tape/*/stats/read_byte_cnt
Date: Apr 2015
KernelVersion: 4.2
Contact: Shane Seymour <shane.seymour@hp.com>
Description:
Shows the total number of bytes requested from the tape drive.
This value is presented in bytes because tape drives support
variable length block sizes.
Users:
What: /sys/class/scsi_tape/*/stats/read_cnt
Date: Apr 2015
KernelVersion: 4.2
Contact: Shane Seymour <shane.seymour@hp.com>
Description:
Shows the total number of read requests issued to the tape
drive.
Users:
What: /sys/class/scsi_tape/*/stats/read_ns
Date: Apr 2015
KernelVersion: 4.2
Contact: Shane Seymour <shane.seymour@hp.com>
Description:
Shows the total amount of time in nanoseconds waiting for
read I/O requests to complete.
Users:
What: /sys/class/scsi_tape/*/stats/write_byte_cnt
Date: Apr 2015
KernelVersion: 4.2
Contact: Shane Seymour <shane.seymour@hp.com>
Description:
Shows the total number of bytes written to the tape drive.
This value is presented in bytes because tape drives support
variable length block sizes.
Users:
What: /sys/class/scsi_tape/*/stats/write_cnt
Date: Apr 2015
KernelVersion: 4.2
Contact: Shane Seymour <shane.seymour@hp.com>
Description:
Shows the total number of write requests issued to the tape
drive.
Users:
What: /sys/class/scsi_tape/*/stats/write_ms
Date: Apr 2015
KernelVersion: 4.2
Contact: Shane Seymour <shane.seymour@hp.com>
Description:
Shows the total amount of time in nanoseconds waiting for
write I/O requests to complete.
Users:
What: /sys/class/scsi_tape/*/stats/resid_cnt
Date: Apr 2015
KernelVersion: 4.2
Contact: Shane Seymour <shane.seymour@hp.com>
Description:
Shows the number of times we found that a residual >0
was found when the SCSI midlayer indicated that there was
an error. For reads this may be a case of someone issuing
reads greater than the block size.
Users:

View File

@@ -1,14 +0,0 @@
What: /sys/class/stm/<stm>/masters
Date: June 2015
KernelVersion: 4.3
Contact: Alexander Shishkin <alexander.shishkin@linux.intel.com>
Description:
Shows first and last available to software master numbers on
this STM device.
What: /sys/class/stm/<stm>/channels
Date: June 2015
KernelVersion: 4.3
Contact: Alexander Shishkin <alexander.shishkin@linux.intel.com>
Description:
Shows the number of channels per master on this STM device.

View File

@@ -1,11 +0,0 @@
What: /sys/class/stm_source/<stm_source>/stm_source_link
Date: June 2015
KernelVersion: 4.3
Contact: Alexander Shishkin <alexander.shishkin@linux.intel.com>
Description:
stm_source device linkage to stm device, where its tracing data
is directed. Reads return an existing connection or "<none>" if
this stm_source is not connected to any stm device yet.
Write an existing (registered) stm device's name here to
connect that device. If a device is already connected to this
stm_source, it will first be disconnected.

View File

@@ -1,24 +0,0 @@
What: /sys/class/zram-control/
Date: August 2015
KernelVersion: 4.2
Contact: Sergey Senozhatsky <sergey.senozhatsky@gmail.com>
Description:
The zram-control/ class sub-directory belongs to zram
device class
What: /sys/class/zram-control/hot_add
Date: August 2015
KernelVersion: 4.2
Contact: Sergey Senozhatsky <sergey.senozhatsky@gmail.com>
Description:
RO attribute. Read operation will cause zram to add a new
device and return its device id back to user (so one can
use /dev/zram<id>), or error code.
What: /sys/class/zram-control/hot_remove
Date: August 2015
KernelVersion: 4.2
Contact: Sergey Senozhatsky <sergey.senozhatsky@gmail.com>
Description:
WO attribute. Remove a specific /dev/zramX device, where X
is a device_id provided by user.

View File

@@ -162,7 +162,7 @@ Description: Discover CPUs in the same CPU frequency coordination domain
What: /sys/devices/system/cpu/cpu*/cache/index3/cache_disable_{0,1}
Date: August 2008
KernelVersion: 2.6.27
Contact: Linux kernel mailing list <linux-kernel@vger.kernel.org>
Contact: discuss@x86-64.org
Description: Disable L3 cache indices
These files exist in every CPU's cache/index3 directory. Each
@@ -243,7 +243,7 @@ Description: Parameters for the CPU cache attributes
coherency_line_size: the minimum amount of data in bytes that gets
transferred from memory to cache
level: the cache hierarchy in the multi-level cache configuration
level: the cache hierarcy in the multi-level cache configuration
number_of_sets: total number of sets in the cache, a set is a
collection of cache lines with the same cache index

View File

@@ -8,13 +8,3 @@ Description: When read, this file returns the device's raw binary HID
report descriptor.
This file cannot be written.
Users: HIDAPI library (http://www.signal11.us/oss/hidapi)
What: For USB devices : /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/country
For BT devices : /sys/class/bluetooth/hci<addr>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/country
Symlink : /sys/class/hidraw/hidraw<num>/device/country
Date: February 2015
KernelVersion: 3.19
Contact: Olivier Gay <ogay@logitech.com>
Description: When read, this file returns the hex integer value in ASCII
of the device's HID country code (e.g. 21 for US).
This file cannot be written.

View File

@@ -1,15 +0,0 @@
What: /sys/bus/drivers/corsair/<dev>/macro_mode
Date: August 2015
KernelVersion: 4.2
Contact: Clement Vuchener <clement.vuchener@gmail.com>
Description: Get/set the current playback mode. "SW" for software mode
where G-keys triggers their regular key codes. "HW" for
hardware playback mode where the G-keys play their macro
from the on-board memory.
What: /sys/bus/drivers/corsair/<dev>/current_profile
Date: August 2015
KernelVersion: 4.2
Contact: Clement Vuchener <clement.vuchener@gmail.com>
Description: Get/set the current selected profile. Values are from 1 to 3.

View File

@@ -1,52 +1,7 @@
What: /sys/bus/hid/drivers/logitech/<dev>/range
What: /sys/module/hid_logitech/drivers/hid:logitech/<dev>/range.
Date: July 2011
KernelVersion: 3.2
Contact: Michal Malý <madcatxster@devoid-pointer.net>
Contact: Michal Malý <madcatxster@gmail.com>
Description: Display minimum, maximum and current range of the steering
wheel. Writing a value within min and max boundaries sets the
range of the wheel.
What: /sys/bus/hid/drivers/logitech/<dev>/alternate_modes
Date: Feb 2015
KernelVersion: 4.1
Contact: Michal Malý <madcatxster@devoid-pointer.net>
Description: Displays a set of alternate modes supported by a wheel. Each
mode is listed as follows:
Tag: Mode Name
Currently active mode is marked with an asterisk. List also
contains an abstract item "native" which always denotes the
native mode of the wheel. Echoing the mode tag switches the
wheel into the corresponding mode. Depending on the exact model
of the wheel not all listed modes might always be selectable.
If a wheel cannot be switched into the desired mode, -EINVAL
is returned accompanied with an explanatory message in the
kernel log.
This entry is not created for devices that have only one mode.
Currently supported mode switches:
Driving Force Pro:
DF-EX --> DFP
G25:
DF-EX --> DFP --> G25
G27:
DF-EX <*> DFP <-> G25 <-> G27
DF-EX <*--------> G25 <-> G27
DF-EX <*----------------> G27
DFGT:
DF-EX <*> DFP <-> DFGT
DF-EX <*--------> DFGT
* hid_logitech module must be loaded with lg4ff_no_autoswitch=1
parameter set in order for the switch to DF-EX mode to work.
What: /sys/bus/hid/drivers/logitech/<dev>/real_id
Date: Feb 2015
KernelVersion: 4.1
Contact: Michal Malý <madcatxster@devoid-pointer.net>
Description: Displays the real model of the wheel regardless of any
alternate mode the wheel might be switched to.
It is a read-only value.
This entry is not created for devices that have only one mode.

View File

@@ -0,0 +1,96 @@
What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/actual_profile
Date: October 2010
Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
Description: The integer value of this attribute ranges from 0-4.
When read, this attribute returns the number of the actual
profile. This value is persistent, so its equivalent to the
profile that's active when the mouse is powered on next time.
When written, this file sets the number of the startup profile
and the mouse activates this profile immediately.
Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/info
Date: November 2012
Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
Description: When read, this file returns general data like firmware version.
When written, the device can be reset.
The data is 8 bytes long.
Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/macro
Date: October 2010
Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
Description: The mouse can store a macro with max 500 key/button strokes
internally.
When written, this file lets one set the sequence for a specific
button for a specific profile. Button and profile numbers are
included in written data. The data has to be 2082 bytes long.
This file is writeonly.
Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/profile_buttons
Date: August 2010
Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the
press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons.
profile_buttons holds information about button layout.
When written, this file lets one write the respective profile
buttons back to the mouse. The data has to be 77 bytes long.
The mouse will reject invalid data.
Which profile to write is determined by the profile number
contained in the data.
Before reading this file, control has to be written to select
which profile to read.
Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/profile_settings
Date: October 2010
Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the
press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons.
profile_settings holds information like resolution, sensitivity
and light effects.
When written, this file lets one write the respective profile
settings back to the mouse. The data has to be 43 bytes long.
The mouse will reject invalid data.
Which profile to write is determined by the profile number
contained in the data.
Before reading this file, control has to be written to select
which profile to read.
Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/sensor
Date: October 2010
Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
Description: The mouse has a tracking- and a distance-control-unit. These
can be activated/deactivated and the lift-off distance can be
set. The data has to be 6 bytes long.
This file is writeonly.
Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/talk
Date: May 2011
Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
Description: Used to active some easy* functions of the mouse from outside.
The data has to be 16 bytes long.
This file is writeonly.
Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/tcu
Date: October 2010
Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
Description: When written a calibration process for the tracking control unit
can be initiated/cancelled. Also lets one read/write sensor
registers.
The data has to be 4 bytes long.
Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/tcu_image
Date: October 2010
Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
Description: When read the mouse returns a 30x30 pixel image of the
sampled underground. This works only in the course of a
calibration process initiated with tcu.
The returned data is 1028 bytes in size.
This file is readonly.
Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net

View File

@@ -0,0 +1,49 @@
What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kovaplus/roccatkovaplus<minor>/actual_profile
Date: January 2011
Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
Description: The integer value of this attribute ranges from 0-4.
When read, this attribute returns the number of the active
profile.
When written, the mouse activates this profile immediately.
The profile that's active when powered down is the same that's
active when the mouse is powered on.
Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kovaplus/roccatkovaplus<minor>/info
Date: November 2012
Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
Description: When read, this file returns general data like firmware version.
When written, the device can be reset.
The data is 6 bytes long.
Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kovaplus/roccatkovaplus<minor>/profile_buttons
Date: January 2011
Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the
press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons.
profile_buttons holds information about button layout.
When written, this file lets one write the respective profile
buttons back to the mouse. The data has to be 23 bytes long.
The mouse will reject invalid data.
Which profile to write is determined by the profile number
contained in the data.
Before reading this file, control has to be written to select
which profile to read.
Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kovaplus/roccatkovaplus<minor>/profile_settings
Date: January 2011
Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the
press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons.
profile_settings holds information like resolution, sensitivity
and light effects.
When written, this file lets one write the respective profile
settings back to the mouse. The data has to be 16 bytes long.
The mouse will reject invalid data.
Which profile to write is determined by the profile number
contained in the data.
Before reading this file, control has to be written to select
which profile to read.
Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net

View File

@@ -0,0 +1,49 @@
What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/info
Date: November 2012
Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
Description: When read, this file returns general data like firmware version.
When written, the device can be reset.
The data is 6 bytes long.
Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/profile_settings
Date: August 2010
Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the
press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons.
profile_settings holds information like resolution, sensitivity
and light effects.
When written, this file lets one write the respective profile
settings back to the mouse. The data has to be 13 bytes long.
The mouse will reject invalid data.
Which profile to write is determined by the profile number
contained in the data.
Before reading this file, control has to be written to select
which profile to read.
Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/profile_buttons
Date: August 2010
Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the
press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons.
profile_buttons holds information about button layout.
When written, this file lets one write the respective profile
buttons back to the mouse. The data has to be 19 bytes long.
The mouse will reject invalid data.
Which profile to write is determined by the profile number
contained in the data.
Before reading this file, control has to be written to select
which profile to read.
Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/settings
Date: August 2010
Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
Description: When read, this file returns the settings stored in the mouse.
The size of the data is 3 bytes and holds information on the
startup_profile.
When written, this file lets write settings back to the mouse.
The data has to be 3 bytes long. The mouse will reject invalid
data.
Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net

View File

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
What: /sys/class/tpm/tpmX/ppi/
What: /sys/devices/pnp0/<bus-num>/ppi/
Date: August 2012
Kernel Version: 3.6
Contact: xiaoyan.zhang@intel.com
@@ -8,14 +8,9 @@ Description:
folder makes sense. The folder path can be got by command
'find /sys/ -name 'pcrs''. For the detail information of PPI,
please refer to the PPI specification from
http://www.trustedcomputinggroup.org/
In Linux 4.2 ppi was moved to the character device directory.
A symlink from tpmX/device/ppi to tpmX/ppi to provide backwards
compatibility.
What: /sys/class/tpm/tpmX/ppi/version
What: /sys/devices/pnp0/<bus-num>/ppi/version
Date: August 2012
Contact: xiaoyan.zhang@intel.com
Description:
@@ -23,7 +18,7 @@ Description:
platform.
This file is readonly.
What: /sys/class/tpm/tpmX/ppi/request
What: /sys/devices/pnp0/<bus-num>/ppi/request
Date: August 2012
Contact: xiaoyan.zhang@intel.com
Description:
@@ -33,7 +28,7 @@ Description:
integer value range from 1 to 160, and 0 means no request.
This file can be read and written.
What: /sys/class/tpm/tpmX/ppi/response
What: /sys/devices/pnp0/00:<bus-num>/ppi/response
Date: August 2012
Contact: xiaoyan.zhang@intel.com
Description:
@@ -42,7 +37,7 @@ Description:
: <response description>".
This file is readonly.
What: /sys/class/tpm/tpmX/ppi/transition_action
What: /sys/devices/pnp0/<bus-num>/ppi/transition_action
Date: August 2012
Contact: xiaoyan.zhang@intel.com
Description:
@@ -52,7 +47,7 @@ Description:
description>".
This file is readonly.
What: /sys/class/tpm/tpmX/ppi/tcg_operations
What: /sys/devices/pnp0/<bus-num>/ppi/tcg_operations
Date: August 2012
Contact: xiaoyan.zhang@intel.com
Description:
@@ -63,7 +58,7 @@ Description:
This attribute is only supported by PPI version 1.2+.
This file is readonly.
What: /sys/class/tpm/tpmX/ppi/vs_operations
What: /sys/devices/pnp0/<bus-num>/ppi/vs_operations
Date: August 2012
Contact: xiaoyan.zhang@intel.com
Description:

View File

@@ -1,12 +0,0 @@
What: /sys/bus/scsi/drivers/st/debug_flag
Date: October 2015
Kernel Version: ?.?
Contact: shane.seymour@hpe.com
Description:
This file allows you to turn debug output from the st driver
off if you write a '0' to the file or on if you write a '1'.
Note that debug output requires that the module be compiled
with the #define DEBUG set to a non-zero value (this is the
default). If DEBUG is set to 0 then this file will not
appear in sysfs as its presence is conditional upon debug
output support being compiled into the module.

View File

@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
What: /sys/devices/*/<our-device>/eeprom
Date: August 2013
Contact: Oliver Schinagl <oliver@schinagl.nl>
Description: read-only access to the SID (Security-ID) on current
A-series SoC's from Allwinner. Currently supports A10, A10s, A13
and A20 CPU's. The earlier A1x series of SoCs exports 16 bytes,
whereas the newer A20 SoC exposes 512 bytes split into sections.
Besides the 16 bytes of SID, there's also an SJTAG area,
HDMI-HDCP key and some custom keys. Below a quick overview, for
details see the user manual:
0x000 128 bit root-key (sun[457]i)
0x010 128 bit boot-key (sun7i)
0x020 64 bit security-jtag-key (sun7i)
0x028 16 bit key configuration (sun7i)
0x02b 16 bit custom-vendor-key (sun7i)
0x02c 320 bit low general key (sun7i)
0x040 32 bit read-control access (sun7i)
0x064 224 bit low general key (sun7i)
0x080 2304 bit HDCP-key (sun7i)
0x1a0 768 bit high general key (sun7i)
Users: any user space application which wants to read the SID on
Allwinner's A-series of CPU's.

View File

@@ -8,11 +8,9 @@ Description: This file controls the keyboard backlight operation mode, valid
* 0x2 -> AUTO (also called TIMER)
* 0x8 -> ON
* 0x10 -> OFF
Note that from kernel 3.16 onwards this file accepts all listed
Note that the kernel 3.16 onwards this file accepts all listed
parameters, kernel 3.15 only accepts the first two (FN-Z and
AUTO).
Also note that toggling this value on type 1 devices, requires
a reboot for changes to take effect.
Users: KToshiba
What: /sys/devices/LNXSYSTM:00/LNXSYBUS:00/TOS{1900,620{0,7,8}}:00/kbd_backlight_timeout
@@ -69,72 +67,15 @@ Description: This file shows the current keyboard backlight type,
* 2 -> Type 2, supporting modes TIMER, ON and OFF
Users: KToshiba
What: /sys/devices/LNXSYSTM:00/LNXSYBUS:00/TOS{1900,620{0,7,8}}:00/usb_sleep_charge
Date: January 23, 2015
KernelVersion: 4.0
Contact: Azael Avalos <coproscefalo@gmail.com>
Description: This file controls the USB Sleep & Charge charging mode, which
can be:
* 0 -> Disabled (0x00)
* 1 -> Alternate (0x09)
* 2 -> Auto (0x21)
* 3 -> Typical (0x11)
Note that from kernel 4.1 onwards this file accepts all listed
values, kernel 4.0 only supports the first three.
Note that this feature only works when connected to power, if
you want to use it under battery, see the entry named
"sleep_functions_on_battery"
Users: KToshiba
What: /sys/devices/LNXSYSTM:00/LNXSYBUS:00/TOS{1900,620{0,7,8}}:00/sleep_functions_on_battery
Date: January 23, 2015
KernelVersion: 4.0
Contact: Azael Avalos <coproscefalo@gmail.com>
Description: This file controls the USB Sleep Functions under battery, and
set the level at which point they will be disabled, accepted
values can be:
* 0 -> Disabled
* 1-100 -> Battery level to disable sleep functions
Currently it prints two values, the first one indicates if the
feature is enabled or disabled, while the second one shows the
current battery level set.
Note that when the value is set to disabled, the sleep function
will only work when connected to power.
Users: KToshiba
What: /sys/devices/LNXSYSTM:00/LNXSYBUS:00/TOS{1900,620{0,7,8}}:00/usb_rapid_charge
Date: January 23, 2015
KernelVersion: 4.0
Contact: Azael Avalos <coproscefalo@gmail.com>
Description: This file controls the USB Rapid Charge state, which can be:
* 0 -> Disabled
* 1 -> Enabled
Note that toggling this value requires a reboot for changes to
take effect.
Users: KToshiba
What: /sys/devices/LNXSYSTM:00/LNXSYBUS:00/TOS{1900,620{0,7,8}}:00/usb_sleep_music
Date: January 23, 2015
KernelVersion: 4.0
Contact: Azael Avalos <coproscefalo@gmail.com>
Description: This file controls the Sleep & Music state, which values can be:
* 0 -> Disabled
* 1 -> Enabled
Note that this feature only works when connected to power, if
you want to use it under battery, see the entry named
"sleep_functions_on_battery"
Users: KToshiba
What: /sys/devices/LNXSYSTM:00/LNXSYBUS:00/TOS{1900,620{0,7,8}}:00/version
Date: February 12, 2015
KernelVersion: 4.0
Date: February, 2015
KernelVersion: 3.20
Contact: Azael Avalos <coproscefalo@gmail.com>
Description: This file shows the current version of the driver
Users: KToshiba
What: /sys/devices/LNXSYSTM:00/LNXSYBUS:00/TOS{1900,620{0,7,8}}:00/fan
Date: February 12, 2015
KernelVersion: 4.0
Date: February, 2015
KernelVersion: 3.20
Contact: Azael Avalos <coproscefalo@gmail.com>
Description: This file controls the state of the internal fan, valid
values are:
@@ -142,8 +83,8 @@ Description: This file controls the state of the internal fan, valid
* 1 -> ON
What: /sys/devices/LNXSYSTM:00/LNXSYBUS:00/TOS{1900,620{0,7,8}}:00/kbd_function_keys
Date: February 12, 2015
KernelVersion: 4.0
Date: February, 2015
KernelVersion: 3.20
Contact: Azael Avalos <coproscefalo@gmail.com>
Description: This file controls the Special Functions (hotkeys) operation
mode, valid values are:
@@ -153,29 +94,21 @@ Description: This file controls the Special Functions (hotkeys) operation
and the hotkeys are accessed via FN-F{1-12}.
In the "Special Functions" mode, the F{1-12} keys trigger the
hotkey and the F{1-12} keys are accessed via FN-F{1-12}.
Note that toggling this value requires a reboot for changes to
take effect.
Users: KToshiba
What: /sys/devices/LNXSYSTM:00/LNXSYBUS:00/TOS{1900,620{0,7,8}}:00/panel_power_on
Date: February 12, 2015
KernelVersion: 4.0
Date: February, 2015
KernelVersion: 3.20
Contact: Azael Avalos <coproscefalo@gmail.com>
Description: This file controls whether the laptop should turn ON whenever
the LID is opened, valid values are:
* 0 -> Disabled
* 1 -> Enabled
Note that toggling this value requires a reboot for changes to
take effect.
Users: KToshiba
What: /sys/devices/LNXSYSTM:00/LNXSYBUS:00/TOS{1900,620{0,7,8}}:00/usb_three
Date: February 12, 2015
KernelVersion: 4.0
Date: February, 2015
KernelVersion: 3.20
Contact: Azael Avalos <coproscefalo@gmail.com>
Description: This file controls the USB 3 functionality, valid values are:
Description: This file controls whether the USB 3 functionality, valid
values are:
* 0 -> Disabled (Acts as a regular USB 2)
* 1 -> Enabled (Full USB 3 functionality)
Note that toggling this value requires a reboot for changes to
take effect.
Users: KToshiba

View File

@@ -1,20 +0,0 @@
What: /sys/devices/LNXSYSTM:00/LNXSYBUS:00/TOS620A:00/protection_level
Date: August 16, 2014
KernelVersion: 3.17
Contact: Azael Avalos <coproscefalo@gmail.com>
Description: This file controls the built-in accelerometer protection level,
valid values are:
* 0 -> Disabled
* 1 -> Low
* 2 -> Medium
* 3 -> High
The default potection value is set to 2 (Medium).
Users: KToshiba
What: /sys/devices/LNXSYSTM:00/LNXSYBUS:00/TOS620A:00/reset_protection
Date: August 16, 2014
KernelVersion: 3.17
Contact: Azael Avalos <coproscefalo@gmail.com>
Description: This file turns off the built-in accelerometer for a few
seconds and then restore normal operation. Accepting 1 as the
only parameter.

View File

@@ -77,22 +77,3 @@ Description:
The format is also scrambled, like in the USB mode, and it can
be summarized by converting 76543210 into GECA6420.
HGFEDCBA HFDB7531
What: /sys/bus/hid/devices/<bus>:<vid>:<pid>.<n>/wacom_remote/unpair_remote
Date: July 2015
Contact: linux-input@vger.kernel.org
Description:
Writing the character sequence '*' followed by a newline to
this file will delete all of the current pairings on the
device. Other character sequences are reserved. This file is
write only.
What: /sys/bus/hid/devices/<bus>:<vid>:<pid>.<n>/wacom_remote/<serial_number>/remote_mode
Date: July 2015
Contact: linux-input@vger.kernel.org
Description:
Reading from this file reports the mode status of the
remote as indicated by the LED lights on the device. If no
reports have been received from the paired device, reading
from this file will report '-1'. The mode is read-only
and cannot be set through the driver.

View File

@@ -0,0 +1,110 @@
What: /sys/firmware/dmi/
Date: February 2011
Contact: Mike Waychison <mikew@google.com>
Description:
Many machines' firmware (x86 and ia64) export DMI /
SMBIOS tables to the operating system. Getting at this
information is often valuable to userland, especially in
cases where there are OEM extensions used.
The kernel itself does not rely on the majority of the
information in these tables being correct. It equally
cannot ensure that the data as exported to userland is
without error either.
DMI is structured as a large table of entries, where
each entry has a common header indicating the type and
length of the entry, as well as a firmware-provided
'handle' that is supposed to be unique amongst all
entries.
Some entries are required by the specification, but many
others are optional. In general though, users should
never expect to find a specific entry type on their
system unless they know for certain what their firmware
is doing. Machine to machine experiences will vary.
Multiple entries of the same type are allowed. In order
to handle these duplicate entry types, each entry is
assigned by the operating system an 'instance', which is
derived from an entry type's ordinal position. That is
to say, if there are 'N' multiple entries with the same type
'T' in the DMI tables (adjacent or spread apart, it
doesn't matter), they will be represented in sysfs as
entries "T-0" through "T-(N-1)":
Example entry directories:
/sys/firmware/dmi/entries/17-0
/sys/firmware/dmi/entries/17-1
/sys/firmware/dmi/entries/17-2
/sys/firmware/dmi/entries/17-3
...
Instance numbers are used in lieu of the firmware
assigned entry handles as the kernel itself makes no
guarantees that handles as exported are unique, and
there are likely firmware images that get this wrong in
the wild.
Each DMI entry in sysfs has the common header values
exported as attributes:
handle : The 16bit 'handle' that is assigned to this
entry by the firmware. This handle may be
referred to by other entries.
length : The length of the entry, as presented in the
entry itself. Note that this is _not the
total count of bytes associated with the
entry_. This value represents the length of
the "formatted" portion of the entry. This
"formatted" region is sometimes followed by
the "unformatted" region composed of nul
terminated strings, with termination signalled
by a two nul characters in series.
raw : The raw bytes of the entry. This includes the
"formatted" portion of the entry, the
"unformatted" strings portion of the entry,
and the two terminating nul characters.
type : The type of the entry. This value is the same
as found in the directory name. It indicates
how the rest of the entry should be interpreted.
instance: The instance ordinal of the entry for the
given type. This value is the same as found
in the parent directory name.
position: The ordinal position (zero-based) of the entry
within the entirety of the DMI entry table.
=== Entry Specialization ===
Some entry types may have other information available in
sysfs. Not all types are specialized.
--- Type 15 - System Event Log ---
This entry allows the firmware to export a log of
events the system has taken. This information is
typically backed by nvram, but the implementation
details are abstracted by this table. This entry's data
is exported in the directory:
/sys/firmware/dmi/entries/15-0/system_event_log
and has the following attributes (documented in the
SMBIOS / DMI specification under "System Event Log (Type 15)":
area_length
header_start_offset
data_start_offset
access_method
status
change_token
access_method_address
header_format
per_log_type_descriptor_length
type_descriptors_supported_count
As well, the kernel exports the binary attribute:
raw_event_log : The raw binary bits of the event log
as described by the DMI entry.

View File

@@ -1,110 +0,0 @@
What: /sys/firmware/dmi/entries/
Date: February 2011
Contact: Mike Waychison <mikew@google.com>
Description:
Many machines' firmware (x86 and ia64) export DMI /
SMBIOS tables to the operating system. Getting at this
information is often valuable to userland, especially in
cases where there are OEM extensions used.
The kernel itself does not rely on the majority of the
information in these tables being correct. It equally
cannot ensure that the data as exported to userland is
without error either.
DMI is structured as a large table of entries, where
each entry has a common header indicating the type and
length of the entry, as well as a firmware-provided
'handle' that is supposed to be unique amongst all
entries.
Some entries are required by the specification, but many
others are optional. In general though, users should
never expect to find a specific entry type on their
system unless they know for certain what their firmware
is doing. Machine to machine experiences will vary.
Multiple entries of the same type are allowed. In order
to handle these duplicate entry types, each entry is
assigned by the operating system an 'instance', which is
derived from an entry type's ordinal position. That is
to say, if there are 'N' multiple entries with the same type
'T' in the DMI tables (adjacent or spread apart, it
doesn't matter), they will be represented in sysfs as
entries "T-0" through "T-(N-1)":
Example entry directories:
/sys/firmware/dmi/entries/17-0
/sys/firmware/dmi/entries/17-1
/sys/firmware/dmi/entries/17-2
/sys/firmware/dmi/entries/17-3
...
Instance numbers are used in lieu of the firmware
assigned entry handles as the kernel itself makes no
guarantees that handles as exported are unique, and
there are likely firmware images that get this wrong in
the wild.
Each DMI entry in sysfs has the common header values
exported as attributes:
handle : The 16bit 'handle' that is assigned to this
entry by the firmware. This handle may be
referred to by other entries.
length : The length of the entry, as presented in the
entry itself. Note that this is _not the
total count of bytes associated with the
entry_. This value represents the length of
the "formatted" portion of the entry. This
"formatted" region is sometimes followed by
the "unformatted" region composed of nul
terminated strings, with termination signalled
by a two nul characters in series.
raw : The raw bytes of the entry. This includes the
"formatted" portion of the entry, the
"unformatted" strings portion of the entry,
and the two terminating nul characters.
type : The type of the entry. This value is the same
as found in the directory name. It indicates
how the rest of the entry should be interpreted.
instance: The instance ordinal of the entry for the
given type. This value is the same as found
in the parent directory name.
position: The ordinal position (zero-based) of the entry
within the entirety of the DMI entry table.
=== Entry Specialization ===
Some entry types may have other information available in
sysfs. Not all types are specialized.
--- Type 15 - System Event Log ---
This entry allows the firmware to export a log of
events the system has taken. This information is
typically backed by nvram, but the implementation
details are abstracted by this table. This entry's data
is exported in the directory:
/sys/firmware/dmi/entries/15-0/system_event_log
and has the following attributes (documented in the
SMBIOS / DMI specification under "System Event Log (Type 15)":
area_length
header_start_offset
data_start_offset
access_method
status
change_token
access_method_address
header_format
per_log_type_descriptor_length
type_descriptors_supported_count
As well, the kernel exports the binary attribute:
raw_event_log : The raw binary bits of the event log
as described by the DMI entry.

View File

@@ -1,22 +0,0 @@
What: /sys/firmware/dmi/tables/
Date: April 2015
Contact: Ivan Khoronzhuk <ivan.khoronzhuk@globallogic.com>
Description:
The firmware provides DMI structures as a packed list of
data referenced by a SMBIOS table entry point. The SMBIOS
entry point contains general information, like SMBIOS
version, DMI table size, etc. The structure, content and
size of SMBIOS entry point is dependent on SMBIOS version.
The format of SMBIOS entry point and DMI structures
can be read in SMBIOS specification.
The dmi/tables provides raw SMBIOS entry point and DMI tables
through sysfs as an alternative to utilities reading them
from /dev/mem. The raw SMBIOS entry point and DMI table are
presented as binary attributes and are accessible via:
/sys/firmware/dmi/tables/smbios_entry_point
/sys/firmware/dmi/tables/DMI
The complete DMI information can be obtained using these two
tables.

View File

@@ -18,13 +18,3 @@ Contact: Dave Young <dyoung@redhat.com>
Description: It shows the physical address of config table entry in the EFI
system table.
Users: Kexec
What: /sys/firmware/efi/systab
Date: April 2005
Contact: linux-efi@vger.kernel.org
Description: Displays the physical addresses of all EFI Configuration
Tables found via the EFI System Table. The order in
which the tables are printed forms an ABI and newer
versions are always printed first, i.e. ACPI20 comes
before ACPI.
Users: dmidecode

View File

@@ -1,81 +0,0 @@
What: /sys/firmware/efi/esrt/
Date: February 2015
Contact: Peter Jones <pjones@redhat.com>
Description: Provides userland access to read the EFI System Resource Table
(ESRT), a catalog of firmware for which can be updated with
the UEFI UpdateCapsule mechanism described in section 7.5 of
the UEFI Standard.
Users: fwupdate - https://github.com/rhinstaller/fwupdate
What: /sys/firmware/efi/esrt/fw_resource_count
Date: February 2015
Contact: Peter Jones <pjones@redhat.com>
Description: The number of entries in the ESRT
What: /sys/firmware/efi/esrt/fw_resource_count_max
Date: February 2015
Contact: Peter Jones <pjones@redhat.com>
Description: The maximum number of entries that /could/ be registered
in the allocation the table is currently in. This is
really only useful to the system firmware itself.
What: /sys/firmware/efi/esrt/fw_resource_version
Date: February 2015
Contact: Peter Jones <pjones@redhat.com>
Description: The version of the ESRT structure provided by the firmware.
What: /sys/firmware/efi/esrt/entries/entry$N/
Date: February 2015
Contact: Peter Jones <pjones@redhat.com>
Description: Each ESRT entry is identified by a GUID, and each gets a
subdirectory under entries/ .
example: /sys/firmware/efi/esrt/entries/entry0/
What: /sys/firmware/efi/esrt/entries/entry$N/fw_type
Date: February 2015
Contact: Peter Jones <pjones@redhat.com>
Description: What kind of firmware entry this is:
0 - Unknown
1 - System Firmware
2 - Device Firmware
3 - UEFI Driver
What: /sys/firmware/efi/esrt/entries/entry$N/fw_class
Date: February 2015
Contact: Peter Jones <pjones@redhat.com>
Description: This is the entry's guid, and will match the directory name.
What: /sys/firmware/efi/esrt/entries/entry$N/fw_version
Date: February 2015
Contact: Peter Jones <pjones@redhat.com>
Description: The version of the firmware currently installed. This is a
32-bit unsigned integer.
What: /sys/firmware/efi/esrt/entries/entry$N/lowest_supported_fw_version
Date: February 2015
Contact: Peter Jones <pjones@redhat.com>
Description: The lowest version of the firmware that can be installed.
What: /sys/firmware/efi/esrt/entries/entry$N/capsule_flags
Date: February 2015
Contact: Peter Jones <pjones@redhat.com>
Description: Flags that must be passed to UpdateCapsule()
What: /sys/firmware/efi/esrt/entries/entry$N/last_attempt_version
Date: February 2015
Contact: Peter Jones <pjones@redhat.com>
Description: The last firmware version for which an update was attempted.
What: /sys/firmware/efi/esrt/entries/entry$N/last_attempt_status
Date: February 2015
Contact: Peter Jones <pjones@redhat.com>
Description: The result of the last firmware update attempt for the
firmware resource entry.
0 - Success
1 - Insufficient resources
2 - Incorrect version
3 - Invalid format
4 - Authentication error
5 - AC power event
6 - Battery power event

View File

@@ -80,15 +80,3 @@ Date: February 2015
Contact: "Jaegeuk Kim" <jaegeuk@kernel.org>
Description:
Controls the trimming rate in batch mode.
What: /sys/fs/f2fs/<disk>/cp_interval
Date: October 2015
Contact: "Jaegeuk Kim" <jaegeuk@kernel.org>
Description:
Controls the checkpoint timing.
What: /sys/fs/f2fs/<disk>/ra_nid_pages
Date: October 2015
Contact: "Chao Yu" <chao2.yu@samsung.com>
Description:
Controls the count of nid pages to be readaheaded.

View File

@@ -16,8 +16,7 @@ Description:
/sys/class/gpio
/export ... asks the kernel to export a GPIO to userspace
/unexport ... to return a GPIO to the kernel
/gpioN ... for each exported GPIO #N OR
/<LINE-NAME> ... for a properly named GPIO line
/gpioN ... for each exported GPIO #N
/value ... always readable, writes fail for input GPIOs
/direction ... r/w as: in, out (default low); write: high, low
/edge ... r/w as: none, falling, rising, both

View File

@@ -1,23 +0,0 @@
What: /sys/hypervisor/pmu/pmu_mode
Date: August 2015
KernelVersion: 4.3
Contact: Boris Ostrovsky <boris.ostrovsky@oracle.com>
Description:
Describes mode that Xen's performance-monitoring unit (PMU)
uses. Accepted values are
"off" -- PMU is disabled
"self" -- The guest can profile itself
"hv" -- The guest can profile itself and, if it is
privileged (e.g. dom0), the hypervisor
"all" -- The guest can profile itself, the hypervisor
and all other guests. Only available to
privileged guests.
What: /sys/hypervisor/pmu/pmu_features
Date: August 2015
KernelVersion: 4.3
Contact: Boris Ostrovsky <boris.ostrovsky@oracle.com>
Description:
Describes Xen PMU features (as an integer). A set bit indicates
that the corresponding feature is enabled. See
include/xen/interface/xenpmu.h for available features

View File

@@ -1,69 +0,0 @@
What: /sys/class/leds/dell::kbd_backlight/als_enabled
Date: December 2014
KernelVersion: 3.19
Contact: Gabriele Mazzotta <gabriele.mzt@gmail.com>,
Pali Rohár <pali.rohar@gmail.com>
Description:
This file allows to control the automatic keyboard
illumination mode on some systems that have an ambient
light sensor. Write 1 to this file to enable the auto
mode, 0 to disable it.
What: /sys/class/leds/dell::kbd_backlight/als_setting
Date: December 2014
KernelVersion: 3.19
Contact: Gabriele Mazzotta <gabriele.mzt@gmail.com>,
Pali Rohár <pali.rohar@gmail.com>
Description:
This file allows to specifiy the on/off threshold value,
as reported by the ambient light sensor.
What: /sys/class/leds/dell::kbd_backlight/start_triggers
Date: December 2014
KernelVersion: 3.19
Contact: Gabriele Mazzotta <gabriele.mzt@gmail.com>,
Pali Rohár <pali.rohar@gmail.com>
Description:
This file allows to control the input triggers that
turn on the keyboard backlight illumination that is
disabled because of inactivity.
Read the file to see the triggers available. The ones
enabled are preceded by '+', those disabled by '-'.
To enable a trigger, write its name preceded by '+' to
this file. To disable a trigger, write its name preceded
by '-' instead.
For example, to enable the keyboard as trigger run:
echo +keyboard > /sys/class/leds/dell::kbd_backlight/start_triggers
To disable it:
echo -keyboard > /sys/class/leds/dell::kbd_backlight/start_triggers
Note that not all the available triggers can be configured.
What: /sys/class/leds/dell::kbd_backlight/stop_timeout
Date: December 2014
KernelVersion: 3.19
Contact: Gabriele Mazzotta <gabriele.mzt@gmail.com>,
Pali Rohár <pali.rohar@gmail.com>
Description:
This file allows to specify the interval after which the
keyboard illumination is disabled because of inactivity.
The timeouts are expressed in seconds, minutes, hours and
days, for which the symbols are 's', 'm', 'h' and 'd'
respectively.
To configure the timeout, write to this file a value along
with any the above units. If no unit is specified, the value
is assumed to be expressed in seconds.
For example, to set the timeout to 10 minutes run:
echo 10m > /sys/class/leds/dell::kbd_backlight/stop_timeout
Note that when this file is read, the returned value might be
expressed in a different unit than the one used when the timeout
was set.
Also note that only some timeouts are supported and that
some systems might fall back to a specific timeout in case
an invalid timeout is written to this file.

View File

@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
What: /sys/bus/platform/devices/*twl4030-usb/vbus
Description:
Read-only status reporting if VBUS (approx 5V)
is being supplied by the USB bus.
Possible values: "on", "off".
Changes are notified via select/poll.

View File

@@ -256,15 +256,3 @@ Description:
Writing a "1" enables this printing while writing a "0"
disables it. The default value is "0". Reading from this file
will display the current value.
What: /sys/power/pm_wakeup_irq
Date: April 2015
Contact: Alexandra Yates <alexandra.yates@linux.intel.org>
Description:
The /sys/power/pm_wakeup_irq file reports to user space the IRQ
number of the first wakeup interrupt (that is, the first
interrupt from an IRQ line armed for system wakeup) seen by the
kernel during the most recent system suspend/resume cycle.
This output is useful for system wakeup diagnostics of spurious
wakeup interrupts.

View File

@@ -43,8 +43,6 @@ o udev 081 # udevd --version
o grub 0.93 # grub --version || grub-install --version
o mcelog 0.6 # mcelog --version
o iptables 1.4.2 # iptables -V
o openssl & libcrypto 1.0.0 # openssl version
o bc 1.06.95 # bc --version
Kernel compilation
@@ -81,17 +79,6 @@ BC
You will need bc to build kernels 3.10 and higher
OpenSSL
-------
Module signing and external certificate handling use the OpenSSL program and
crypto library to do key creation and signature generation.
You will need openssl to build kernels 3.7 and higher if module signing is
enabled. You will also need openssl development packages to build kernels 4.3
and higher.
System utilities
================
@@ -308,10 +295,6 @@ Binutils
--------
o <ftp://ftp.kernel.org/pub/linux/devel/binutils/>
OpenSSL
-------
o <https://www.openssl.org/>
System utilities
****************
@@ -409,3 +392,4 @@ o <http://oprofile.sf.net/download/>
NFS-Utils
---------
o <http://nfs.sourceforge.net/>

View File

@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ and NOT read it. Burn them, it's a great symbolic gesture.
Anyway, here goes:
Chapter 1: Indentation
Chapter 1: Indentation
Tabs are 8 characters, and thus indentations are also 8 characters.
There are heretic movements that try to make indentations 4 (or even 2!)
@@ -56,6 +56,7 @@ instead of "double-indenting" the "case" labels. E.g.:
break;
}
Don't put multiple statements on a single line unless you have
something to hide:
@@ -155,25 +156,25 @@ comments on.
Do not unnecessarily use braces where a single statement will do.
if (condition)
action();
if (condition)
action();
and
if (condition)
do_this();
else
do_that();
if (condition)
do_this();
else
do_that();
This does not apply if only one branch of a conditional statement is a single
statement; in the latter case use braces in both branches:
if (condition) {
do_this();
do_that();
} else {
otherwise();
}
if (condition) {
do_this();
do_that();
} else {
otherwise();
}
3.1: Spaces
@@ -185,11 +186,8 @@ although they are not required in the language, as in: "sizeof info" after
"struct fileinfo info;" is declared).
So use a space after these keywords:
if, switch, case, for, do, while
but not with sizeof, typeof, alignof, or __attribute__. E.g.,
s = sizeof(struct file);
Do not add spaces around (inside) parenthesized expressions. This example is
@@ -211,15 +209,12 @@ such as any of these:
= + - < > * / % | & ^ <= >= == != ? :
but no space after unary operators:
& * + - ~ ! sizeof typeof alignof __attribute__ defined
no space before the postfix increment & decrement unary operators:
++ --
no space after the prefix increment & decrement unary operators:
++ --
and no space around the '.' and "->" structure member operators.
@@ -273,11 +268,13 @@ See chapter 6 (Functions).
Chapter 5: Typedefs
Please don't use things like "vps_t".
It's a _mistake_ to use typedef for structures and pointers. When you see a
vps_t a;
in the source, what does it mean?
In contrast, if it says
struct virtual_container *a;
@@ -375,11 +372,11 @@ In source files, separate functions with one blank line. If the function is
exported, the EXPORT* macro for it should follow immediately after the closing
function brace line. E.g.:
int system_is_up(void)
{
return system_state == SYSTEM_RUNNING;
}
EXPORT_SYMBOL(system_is_up);
int system_is_up(void)
{
return system_state == SYSTEM_RUNNING;
}
EXPORT_SYMBOL(system_is_up);
In function prototypes, include parameter names with their data types.
Although this is not required by the C language, it is preferred in Linux
@@ -408,34 +405,34 @@ The rationale for using gotos is:
modifications are prevented
- saves the compiler work to optimize redundant code away ;)
int fun(int a)
{
int result = 0;
char *buffer;
int fun(int a)
{
int result = 0;
char *buffer;
buffer = kmalloc(SIZE, GFP_KERNEL);
if (!buffer)
return -ENOMEM;
buffer = kmalloc(SIZE, GFP_KERNEL);
if (!buffer)
return -ENOMEM;
if (condition1) {
while (loop1) {
...
}
result = 1;
goto out_buffer;
if (condition1) {
while (loop1) {
...
}
...
out_buffer:
kfree(buffer);
return result;
result = 1;
goto out_buffer;
}
...
out_buffer:
kfree(buffer);
return result;
}
A common type of bug to be aware of it "one err bugs" which look like this:
err:
kfree(foo->bar);
kfree(foo);
return ret;
err:
kfree(foo->bar);
kfree(foo);
return ret;
The bug in this code is that on some exit paths "foo" is NULL. Normally the
fix for this is to split it up into two error labels "err_bar:" and "err_foo:".
@@ -506,9 +503,9 @@ values. To do the latter, you can stick the following in your .emacs file:
(defun c-lineup-arglist-tabs-only (ignored)
"Line up argument lists by tabs, not spaces"
(let* ((anchor (c-langelem-pos c-syntactic-element))
(column (c-langelem-2nd-pos c-syntactic-element))
(offset (- (1+ column) anchor))
(steps (floor offset c-basic-offset)))
(column (c-langelem-2nd-pos c-syntactic-element))
(offset (- (1+ column) anchor))
(steps (floor offset c-basic-offset)))
(* (max steps 1)
c-basic-offset)))
@@ -615,7 +612,7 @@ have a reference count on it, you almost certainly have a bug.
Names of macros defining constants and labels in enums are capitalized.
#define CONSTANT 0x12345
#define CONSTANT 0x12345
Enums are preferred when defining several related constants.
@@ -626,28 +623,28 @@ Generally, inline functions are preferable to macros resembling functions.
Macros with multiple statements should be enclosed in a do - while block:
#define macrofun(a, b, c) \
do { \
if (a == 5) \
do_this(b, c); \
} while (0)
#define macrofun(a, b, c) \
do { \
if (a == 5) \
do_this(b, c); \
} while (0)
Things to avoid when using macros:
1) macros that affect control flow:
#define FOO(x) \
do { \
if (blah(x) < 0) \
return -EBUGGERED; \
} while(0)
#define FOO(x) \
do { \
if (blah(x) < 0) \
return -EBUGGERED; \
} while(0)
is a _very_ bad idea. It looks like a function call but exits the "calling"
function; don't break the internal parsers of those who will read the code.
2) macros that depend on having a local variable with a magic name:
#define FOO(val) bar(index, val)
#define FOO(val) bar(index, val)
might look like a good thing, but it's confusing as hell when one reads the
code and it's prone to breakage from seemingly innocent changes.
@@ -659,21 +656,8 @@ bite you if somebody e.g. turns FOO into an inline function.
must enclose the expression in parentheses. Beware of similar issues with
macros using parameters.
#define CONSTANT 0x4000
#define CONSTEXP (CONSTANT | 3)
5) namespace collisions when defining local variables in macros resembling
functions:
#define FOO(x) \
({ \
typeof(x) ret; \
ret = calc_ret(x); \
(ret); \
})
ret is a common name for a local variable - __foo_ret is less likely
to collide with an existing variable.
#define CONSTANT 0x4000
#define CONSTEXP (CONSTANT | 3)
The cpp manual deals with macros exhaustively. The gcc internals manual also
covers RTL which is used frequently with assembly language in the kernel.
@@ -812,11 +796,11 @@ you should use, rather than explicitly coding some variant of them yourself.
For example, if you need to calculate the length of an array, take advantage
of the macro
#define ARRAY_SIZE(x) (sizeof(x) / sizeof((x)[0]))
#define ARRAY_SIZE(x) (sizeof(x) / sizeof((x)[0]))
Similarly, if you need to calculate the size of some structure member, use
#define FIELD_SIZEOF(t, f) (sizeof(((t*)0)->f))
#define FIELD_SIZEOF(t, f) (sizeof(((t*)0)->f))
There are also min() and max() macros that do strict type checking if you
need them. Feel free to peruse that header file to see what else is already
@@ -829,19 +813,19 @@ Some editors can interpret configuration information embedded in source files,
indicated with special markers. For example, emacs interprets lines marked
like this:
-*- mode: c -*-
-*- mode: c -*-
Or like this:
/*
Local Variables:
compile-command: "gcc -DMAGIC_DEBUG_FLAG foo.c"
End:
*/
/*
Local Variables:
compile-command: "gcc -DMAGIC_DEBUG_FLAG foo.c"
End:
*/
Vim interprets markers that look like this:
/* vim:set sw=8 noet */
/* vim:set sw=8 noet */
Do not include any of these in source files. People have their own personal
editor configurations, and your source files should not override them. This
@@ -918,9 +902,9 @@ At the end of any non-trivial #if or #ifdef block (more than a few lines),
place a comment after the #endif on the same line, noting the conditional
expression used. For instance:
#ifdef CONFIG_SOMETHING
...
#endif /* CONFIG_SOMETHING */
#ifdef CONFIG_SOMETHING
...
#endif /* CONFIG_SOMETHING */
Appendix I: References
@@ -929,11 +913,13 @@ The C Programming Language, Second Edition
by Brian W. Kernighan and Dennis M. Ritchie.
Prentice Hall, Inc., 1988.
ISBN 0-13-110362-8 (paperback), 0-13-110370-9 (hardback).
URL: http://cm.bell-labs.com/cm/cs/cbook/
The Practice of Programming
by Brian W. Kernighan and Rob Pike.
Addison-Wesley, Inc., 1999.
ISBN 0-201-61586-X.
URL: http://cm.bell-labs.com/cm/cs/tpop/
GNU manuals - where in compliance with K&R and this text - for cpp, gcc,
gcc internals and indent, all available from http://www.gnu.org/manual/

View File

@@ -25,18 +25,13 @@ physical addresses. These are the addresses in /proc/iomem. The physical
address is not directly useful to a driver; it must use ioremap() to map
the space and produce a virtual address.
I/O devices use a third kind of address: a "bus address". If a device has
registers at an MMIO address, or if it performs DMA to read or write system
memory, the addresses used by the device are bus addresses. In some
systems, bus addresses are identical to CPU physical addresses, but in
general they are not. IOMMUs and host bridges can produce arbitrary
I/O devices use a third kind of address: a "bus address" or "DMA address".
If a device has registers at an MMIO address, or if it performs DMA to read
or write system memory, the addresses used by the device are bus addresses.
In some systems, bus addresses are identical to CPU physical addresses, but
in general they are not. IOMMUs and host bridges can produce arbitrary
mappings between physical and bus addresses.
From a device's point of view, DMA uses the bus address space, but it may
be restricted to a subset of that space. For example, even if a system
supports 64-bit addresses for main memory and PCI BARs, it may use an IOMMU
so devices only need to use 32-bit DMA addresses.
Here's a picture and some examples:
CPU CPU Bus
@@ -77,11 +72,11 @@ can use virtual address X to access the buffer, but the device itself
cannot because DMA doesn't go through the CPU virtual memory system.
In some simple systems, the device can do DMA directly to physical address
Y. But in many others, there is IOMMU hardware that translates DMA
Y. But in many others, there is IOMMU hardware that translates bus
addresses to physical addresses, e.g., it translates Z to Y. This is part
of the reason for the DMA API: the driver can give a virtual address X to
an interface like dma_map_single(), which sets up any required IOMMU
mapping and returns the DMA address Z. The driver then tells the device to
mapping and returns the bus address Z. The driver then tells the device to
do DMA to Z, and the IOMMU maps it to the buffer at address Y in system
RAM.
@@ -103,7 +98,7 @@ First of all, you should make sure
#include <linux/dma-mapping.h>
is in your driver, which provides the definition of dma_addr_t. This type
can hold any valid DMA address for the platform and should be used
can hold any valid DMA or bus address for the platform and should be used
everywhere you hold a DMA address returned from the DMA mapping functions.
What memory is DMA'able?
@@ -245,7 +240,7 @@ the case would look like this:
if (!dma_set_mask_and_coherent(dev, DMA_BIT_MASK(64))) {
using_dac = 1;
consistent_using_dac = 1;
consistent_using_dac = 1;
} else if (!dma_set_mask_and_coherent(dev, DMA_BIT_MASK(32))) {
using_dac = 0;
consistent_using_dac = 0;
@@ -321,7 +316,7 @@ There are two types of DMA mappings:
Think of "consistent" as "synchronous" or "coherent".
The current default is to return consistent memory in the low 32
bits of the DMA space. However, for future compatibility you should
bits of the bus space. However, for future compatibility you should
set the consistent mask even if this default is fine for your
driver.
@@ -358,7 +353,7 @@ There are two types of DMA mappings:
transfer, unmapped right after it (unless you use dma_sync_* below)
and for which hardware can optimize for sequential accesses.
Think of "streaming" as "asynchronous" or "outside the coherency
This of "streaming" as "asynchronous" or "outside the coherency
domain".
Good examples of what to use streaming mappings for are:
@@ -408,7 +403,7 @@ dma_alloc_coherent() returns two values: the virtual address which you
can use to access it from the CPU and dma_handle which you pass to the
card.
The CPU virtual address and the DMA address are both
The CPU virtual address and the DMA bus address are both
guaranteed to be aligned to the smallest PAGE_SIZE order which
is greater than or equal to the requested size. This invariant
exists (for example) to guarantee that if you allocate a chunk
@@ -650,8 +645,8 @@ PLEASE NOTE: The 'nents' argument to the dma_unmap_sg call must be
dma_map_sg call.
Every dma_map_{single,sg}() call should have its dma_unmap_{single,sg}()
counterpart, because the DMA address space is a shared resource and
you could render the machine unusable by consuming all DMA addresses.
counterpart, because the bus address space is a shared resource and
you could render the machine unusable by consuming all bus addresses.
If you need to use the same streaming DMA region multiple times and touch
the data in between the DMA transfers, the buffer needs to be synced
@@ -681,11 +676,6 @@ or:
as appropriate.
PLEASE NOTE: The 'nents' argument to dma_sync_sg_for_cpu() and
dma_sync_sg_for_device() must be the same passed to
dma_map_sg(). It is _NOT_ the count returned by
dma_map_sg().
After the last DMA transfer call one of the DMA unmap routines
dma_unmap_{single,sg}(). If you don't touch the data from the first
dma_map_*() call till dma_unmap_*(), then you don't have to call the

View File

@@ -18,10 +18,10 @@ Part I - dma_ API
To get the dma_ API, you must #include <linux/dma-mapping.h>. This
provides dma_addr_t and the interfaces described below.
A dma_addr_t can hold any valid DMA address for the platform. It can be
given to a device to use as a DMA source or target. A CPU cannot reference
a dma_addr_t directly because there may be translation between its physical
address space and the DMA address space.
A dma_addr_t can hold any valid DMA or bus address for the platform. It
can be given to a device to use as a DMA source or target. A CPU cannot
reference a dma_addr_t directly because there may be translation between
its physical address space and the bus address space.
Part Ia - Using large DMA-coherent buffers
------------------------------------------
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ It returns a pointer to the allocated region (in the processor's virtual
address space) or NULL if the allocation failed.
It also returns a <dma_handle> which may be cast to an unsigned integer the
same width as the bus and given to the device as the DMA address base of
same width as the bus and given to the device as the bus address base of
the region.
Note: consistent memory can be expensive on some platforms, and the
@@ -104,13 +104,6 @@ crossing restrictions, pass 0 for alloc; passing 4096 says memory allocated
from this pool must not cross 4KByte boundaries.
void *dma_pool_zalloc(struct dma_pool *pool, gfp_t mem_flags,
dma_addr_t *handle)
Wraps dma_pool_alloc() and also zeroes the returned memory if the
allocation attempt succeeded.
void *dma_pool_alloc(struct dma_pool *pool, gfp_t gfp_flags,
dma_addr_t *dma_handle);
@@ -141,6 +134,19 @@ memory back to the pool before you destroy it.
Part Ic - DMA addressing limitations
------------------------------------
int
dma_supported(struct device *dev, u64 mask)
Checks to see if the device can support DMA to the memory described by
mask.
Returns: 1 if it can and 0 if it can't.
Notes: This routine merely tests to see if the mask is possible. It
won't change the current mask settings. It is more intended as an
internal API for use by the platform than an external API for use by
driver writers.
int
dma_set_mask_and_coherent(struct device *dev, u64 mask)
@@ -187,7 +193,7 @@ dma_map_single(struct device *dev, void *cpu_addr, size_t size,
enum dma_data_direction direction)
Maps a piece of processor virtual memory so it can be accessed by the
device and returns the DMA address of the memory.
device and returns the bus address of the memory.
The direction for both APIs may be converted freely by casting.
However the dma_ API uses a strongly typed enumerator for its
@@ -206,20 +212,20 @@ contiguous piece of memory. For this reason, memory to be mapped by
this API should be obtained from sources which guarantee it to be
physically contiguous (like kmalloc).
Further, the DMA address of the memory must be within the
Further, the bus address of the memory must be within the
dma_mask of the device (the dma_mask is a bit mask of the
addressable region for the device, i.e., if the DMA address of
the memory ANDed with the dma_mask is still equal to the DMA
addressable region for the device, i.e., if the bus address of
the memory ANDed with the dma_mask is still equal to the bus
address, then the device can perform DMA to the memory). To
ensure that the memory allocated by kmalloc is within the dma_mask,
the driver may specify various platform-dependent flags to restrict
the DMA address range of the allocation (e.g., on x86, GFP_DMA
guarantees to be within the first 16MB of available DMA addresses,
the bus address range of the allocation (e.g., on x86, GFP_DMA
guarantees to be within the first 16MB of available bus addresses,
as required by ISA devices).
Note also that the above constraints on physical contiguity and
dma_mask may not apply if the platform has an IOMMU (a device which
maps an I/O DMA address to a physical memory address). However, to be
maps an I/O bus address to a physical memory address). However, to be
portable, device driver writers may *not* assume that such an IOMMU
exists.
@@ -290,7 +296,7 @@ reduce current DMA mapping usage or delay and try again later).
dma_map_sg(struct device *dev, struct scatterlist *sg,
int nents, enum dma_data_direction direction)
Returns: the number of DMA address segments mapped (this may be shorter
Returns: the number of bus address segments mapped (this may be shorter
than <nents> passed in if some elements of the scatter/gather list are
physically or virtually adjacent and an IOMMU maps them with a single
entry).
@@ -327,14 +333,14 @@ accessed sg->address and sg->length as shown above.
void
dma_unmap_sg(struct device *dev, struct scatterlist *sg,
int nents, enum dma_data_direction direction)
int nhwentries, enum dma_data_direction direction)
Unmap the previously mapped scatter/gather list. All the parameters
must be the same as those and passed in to the scatter/gather mapping
API.
Note: <nents> must be the number you passed in, *not* the number of
DMA address entries returned.
bus address entries returned.
void
dma_sync_single_for_cpu(struct device *dev, dma_addr_t dma_handle, size_t size,
@@ -343,10 +349,10 @@ void
dma_sync_single_for_device(struct device *dev, dma_addr_t dma_handle, size_t size,
enum dma_data_direction direction)
void
dma_sync_sg_for_cpu(struct device *dev, struct scatterlist *sg, int nents,
dma_sync_sg_for_cpu(struct device *dev, struct scatterlist *sg, int nelems,
enum dma_data_direction direction)
void
dma_sync_sg_for_device(struct device *dev, struct scatterlist *sg, int nents,
dma_sync_sg_for_device(struct device *dev, struct scatterlist *sg, int nelems,
enum dma_data_direction direction)
Synchronise a single contiguous or scatter/gather mapping for the CPU
@@ -501,7 +507,7 @@ it's asked for coherent memory for this device.
phys_addr is the CPU physical address to which the memory is currently
assigned (this will be ioremapped so the CPU can access the region).
device_addr is the DMA address the device needs to be programmed
device_addr is the bus address the device needs to be programmed
with to actually address this memory (this will be handed out as the
dma_addr_t in dma_alloc_coherent()).

View File

@@ -11,7 +11,5 @@
*.png
*.gif
*.svg
*.proc
*.db
media-indices.tmpl
media-entities.tmpl

View File

@@ -154,9 +154,8 @@
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_scan_request
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_scan_done
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_bss
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_inform_bss
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_inform_bss_frame_data
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_inform_bss_data
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_inform_bss_width_frame
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_inform_bss_width
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_unlink_bss
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_find_ie
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h ieee80211_bss_get_ie

View File

@@ -14,8 +14,8 @@ DOCBOOKS := z8530book.xml device-drivers.xml \
genericirq.xml s390-drivers.xml uio-howto.xml scsi.xml \
80211.xml debugobjects.xml sh.xml regulator.xml \
alsa-driver-api.xml writing-an-alsa-driver.xml \
tracepoint.xml gpu.xml media_api.xml w1.xml \
writing_musb_glue_layer.xml crypto-API.xml iio.xml
tracepoint.xml drm.xml media_api.xml w1.xml \
writing_musb_glue_layer.xml crypto-API.xml
include Documentation/DocBook/media/Makefile
@@ -56,25 +56,16 @@ htmldocs: $(HTML)
MAN := $(patsubst %.xml, %.9, $(BOOKS))
mandocs: $(MAN)
find $(obj)/man -name '*.9' | xargs gzip -nf
find $(obj)/man -name '*.9' | xargs gzip -f
installmandocs: mandocs
mkdir -p /usr/local/man/man9/
find $(obj)/man -name '*.9.gz' -printf '%h %f\n' | \
sort -k 2 -k 1 | uniq -f 1 | sed -e 's: :/:' | \
xargs install -m 644 -t /usr/local/man/man9/
install $(obj)/man/*.9.gz /usr/local/man/man9/
###
#External programs used
KERNELDOCXMLREF = $(srctree)/scripts/kernel-doc-xml-ref
KERNELDOC = $(srctree)/scripts/kernel-doc
DOCPROC = $(objtree)/scripts/docproc
CHECK_LC_CTYPE = $(objtree)/scripts/check-lc_ctype
# Use a fixed encoding - UTF-8 if the C library has support built-in
# or ASCII if not
LC_CTYPE := $(call try-run, LC_CTYPE=C.UTF-8 $(CHECK_LC_CTYPE),C.UTF-8,C)
export LC_CTYPE
KERNELDOC = $(srctree)/scripts/kernel-doc
DOCPROC = $(objtree)/scripts/docproc
XMLTOFLAGS = -m $(srctree)/$(src)/stylesheet.xsl
XMLTOFLAGS += --skip-validation
@@ -98,7 +89,7 @@ define rule_docproc
) > $(dir $@).$(notdir $@).cmd
endef
%.xml: %.tmpl $(KERNELDOC) $(DOCPROC) $(KERNELDOCXMLREF) FORCE
%.xml: %.tmpl $(KERNELDOC) $(DOCPROC) FORCE
$(call if_changed_rule,docproc)
# Tell kbuild to always build the programs
@@ -149,20 +140,7 @@ quiet_cmd_db2html = HTML $@
echo '<a HREF="$(patsubst %.html,%,$(notdir $@))/index.html"> \
$(patsubst %.html,%,$(notdir $@))</a><p>' > $@
###
# Rules to create an aux XML and .db, and use them to re-process the DocBook XML
# to fill internal hyperlinks
gen_aux_xml = :
quiet_gen_aux_xml = echo ' XMLREF $@'
silent_gen_aux_xml = :
%.aux.xml: %.xml
@$($(quiet)gen_aux_xml)
@rm -rf $@
@(cat $< | egrep "^<refentry id" | egrep -o "\".*\"" | cut -f 2 -d \" > $<.db)
@$(KERNELDOCXMLREF) -db $<.db $< > $@
.PRECIOUS: %.aux.xml
%.html: %.aux.xml
%.html: %.xml
@(which xmlto > /dev/null 2>&1) || \
(echo "*** You need to install xmlto ***"; \
exit 1)
@@ -172,12 +150,12 @@ silent_gen_aux_xml = :
cp $(PNG-$(basename $(notdir $@))) $(patsubst %.html,%,$@); fi
quiet_cmd_db2man = MAN $@
cmd_db2man = if grep -q refentry $<; then xmlto man $(XMLTOFLAGS) -o $(obj)/man/$(*F) $< ; fi
cmd_db2man = if grep -q refentry $<; then xmlto man $(XMLTOFLAGS) -o $(obj)/man $< ; fi
%.9 : %.xml
@(which xmlto > /dev/null 2>&1) || \
(echo "*** You need to install xmlto ***"; \
exit 1)
$(Q)mkdir -p $(obj)/man/$(*F)
$(Q)mkdir -p $(obj)/man
$(call cmd,db2man)
@touch $@
@@ -231,18 +209,15 @@ dochelp:
###
# Temporary files left by various tools
clean-files := $(DOCBOOKS) \
$(patsubst %.xml, %.dvi, $(DOCBOOKS)) \
$(patsubst %.xml, %.aux, $(DOCBOOKS)) \
$(patsubst %.xml, %.tex, $(DOCBOOKS)) \
$(patsubst %.xml, %.log, $(DOCBOOKS)) \
$(patsubst %.xml, %.out, $(DOCBOOKS)) \
$(patsubst %.xml, %.ps, $(DOCBOOKS)) \
$(patsubst %.xml, %.pdf, $(DOCBOOKS)) \
$(patsubst %.xml, %.html, $(DOCBOOKS)) \
$(patsubst %.xml, %.9, $(DOCBOOKS)) \
$(patsubst %.xml, %.aux.xml, $(DOCBOOKS)) \
$(patsubst %.xml, %.xml.db, $(DOCBOOKS)) \
$(patsubst %.xml, %.xml, $(DOCBOOKS)) \
$(patsubst %.xml, %.dvi, $(DOCBOOKS)) \
$(patsubst %.xml, %.aux, $(DOCBOOKS)) \
$(patsubst %.xml, %.tex, $(DOCBOOKS)) \
$(patsubst %.xml, %.log, $(DOCBOOKS)) \
$(patsubst %.xml, %.out, $(DOCBOOKS)) \
$(patsubst %.xml, %.ps, $(DOCBOOKS)) \
$(patsubst %.xml, %.pdf, $(DOCBOOKS)) \
$(patsubst %.xml, %.html, $(DOCBOOKS)) \
$(patsubst %.xml, %.9, $(DOCBOOKS)) \
$(index)
clean-dirs := $(patsubst %.xml,%,$(DOCBOOKS)) man

View File

@@ -108,12 +108,10 @@
<sect1><title>ASoC Core API</title>
!Iinclude/sound/soc.h
!Esound/soc/soc-core.c
<!-- !Esound/soc/soc-cache.c no docbook comments here -->
!Esound/soc/soc-cache.c
!Esound/soc/soc-devres.c
!Esound/soc/soc-io.c
!Esound/soc/soc-pcm.c
!Esound/soc/soc-ops.c
!Esound/soc/soc-compress.c
</sect1>
<sect1><title>ASoC DAPM API</title>
!Esound/soc/soc-dapm.c

View File

@@ -119,7 +119,7 @@
<para>
Note: The terms "transformation" and cipher algorithm are used
interchangeably.
interchangably.
</para>
</sect1>
@@ -509,270 +509,6 @@
select it due to the used type and mask field.
</para>
</sect1>
<sect1><title>Internal Structure of Kernel Crypto API</title>
<para>
The kernel crypto API has an internal structure where a cipher
implementation may use many layers and indirections. This section
shall help to clarify how the kernel crypto API uses
various components to implement the complete cipher.
</para>
<para>
The following subsections explain the internal structure based
on existing cipher implementations. The first section addresses
the most complex scenario where all other scenarios form a logical
subset.
</para>
<sect2><title>Generic AEAD Cipher Structure</title>
<para>
The following ASCII art decomposes the kernel crypto API layers
when using the AEAD cipher with the automated IV generation. The
shown example is used by the IPSEC layer.
</para>
<para>
For other use cases of AEAD ciphers, the ASCII art applies as
well, but the caller may not use the AEAD cipher with a separate
IV generator. In this case, the caller must generate the IV.
</para>
<para>
The depicted example decomposes the AEAD cipher of GCM(AES) based
on the generic C implementations (gcm.c, aes-generic.c, ctr.c,
ghash-generic.c, seqiv.c). The generic implementation serves as an
example showing the complete logic of the kernel crypto API.
</para>
<para>
It is possible that some streamlined cipher implementations (like
AES-NI) provide implementations merging aspects which in the view
of the kernel crypto API cannot be decomposed into layers any more.
In case of the AES-NI implementation, the CTR mode, the GHASH
implementation and the AES cipher are all merged into one cipher
implementation registered with the kernel crypto API. In this case,
the concept described by the following ASCII art applies too. However,
the decomposition of GCM into the individual sub-components
by the kernel crypto API is not done any more.
</para>
<para>
Each block in the following ASCII art is an independent cipher
instance obtained from the kernel crypto API. Each block
is accessed by the caller or by other blocks using the API functions
defined by the kernel crypto API for the cipher implementation type.
</para>
<para>
The blocks below indicate the cipher type as well as the specific
logic implemented in the cipher.
</para>
<para>
The ASCII art picture also indicates the call structure, i.e. who
calls which component. The arrows point to the invoked block
where the caller uses the API applicable to the cipher type
specified for the block.
</para>
<programlisting>
<![CDATA[
kernel crypto API | IPSEC Layer
|
+-----------+ |
| | (1)
| aead | <----------------------------------- esp_output
| (seqiv) | ---+
+-----------+ |
| (2)
+-----------+ |
| | <--+ (2)
| aead | <----------------------------------- esp_input
| (gcm) | ------------+
+-----------+ |
| (3) | (5)
v v
+-----------+ +-----------+
| | | |
| ablkcipher| | ahash |
| (ctr) | ---+ | (ghash) |
+-----------+ | +-----------+
|
+-----------+ | (4)
| | <--+
| cipher |
| (aes) |
+-----------+
]]>
</programlisting>
<para>
The following call sequence is applicable when the IPSEC layer
triggers an encryption operation with the esp_output function. During
configuration, the administrator set up the use of rfc4106(gcm(aes)) as
the cipher for ESP. The following call sequence is now depicted in the
ASCII art above:
</para>
<orderedlist>
<listitem>
<para>
esp_output() invokes crypto_aead_encrypt() to trigger an encryption
operation of the AEAD cipher with IV generator.
</para>
<para>
In case of GCM, the SEQIV implementation is registered as GIVCIPHER
in crypto_rfc4106_alloc().
</para>
<para>
The SEQIV performs its operation to generate an IV where the core
function is seqiv_geniv().
</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para>
Now, SEQIV uses the AEAD API function calls to invoke the associated
AEAD cipher. In our case, during the instantiation of SEQIV, the
cipher handle for GCM is provided to SEQIV. This means that SEQIV
invokes AEAD cipher operations with the GCM cipher handle.
</para>
<para>
During instantiation of the GCM handle, the CTR(AES) and GHASH
ciphers are instantiated. The cipher handles for CTR(AES) and GHASH
are retained for later use.
</para>
<para>
The GCM implementation is responsible to invoke the CTR mode AES and
the GHASH cipher in the right manner to implement the GCM
specification.
</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para>
The GCM AEAD cipher type implementation now invokes the ABLKCIPHER API
with the instantiated CTR(AES) cipher handle.
</para>
<para>
During instantiation of the CTR(AES) cipher, the CIPHER type
implementation of AES is instantiated. The cipher handle for AES is
retained.
</para>
<para>
That means that the ABLKCIPHER implementation of CTR(AES) only
implements the CTR block chaining mode. After performing the block
chaining operation, the CIPHER implementation of AES is invoked.
</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para>
The ABLKCIPHER of CTR(AES) now invokes the CIPHER API with the AES
cipher handle to encrypt one block.
</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para>
The GCM AEAD implementation also invokes the GHASH cipher
implementation via the AHASH API.
</para>
</listitem>
</orderedlist>
<para>
When the IPSEC layer triggers the esp_input() function, the same call
sequence is followed with the only difference that the operation starts
with step (2).
</para>
</sect2>
<sect2><title>Generic Block Cipher Structure</title>
<para>
Generic block ciphers follow the same concept as depicted with the ASCII
art picture above.
</para>
<para>
For example, CBC(AES) is implemented with cbc.c, and aes-generic.c. The
ASCII art picture above applies as well with the difference that only
step (4) is used and the ABLKCIPHER block chaining mode is CBC.
</para>
</sect2>
<sect2><title>Generic Keyed Message Digest Structure</title>
<para>
Keyed message digest implementations again follow the same concept as
depicted in the ASCII art picture above.
</para>
<para>
For example, HMAC(SHA256) is implemented with hmac.c and
sha256_generic.c. The following ASCII art illustrates the
implementation:
</para>
<programlisting>
<![CDATA[
kernel crypto API | Caller
|
+-----------+ (1) |
| | <------------------ some_function
| ahash |
| (hmac) | ---+
+-----------+ |
| (2)
+-----------+ |
| | <--+
| shash |
| (sha256) |
+-----------+
]]>
</programlisting>
<para>
The following call sequence is applicable when a caller triggers
an HMAC operation:
</para>
<orderedlist>
<listitem>
<para>
The AHASH API functions are invoked by the caller. The HMAC
implementation performs its operation as needed.
</para>
<para>
During initialization of the HMAC cipher, the SHASH cipher type of
SHA256 is instantiated. The cipher handle for the SHA256 instance is
retained.
</para>
<para>
At one time, the HMAC implementation requires a SHA256 operation
where the SHA256 cipher handle is used.
</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para>
The HMAC instance now invokes the SHASH API with the SHA256
cipher handle to calculate the message digest.
</para>
</listitem>
</orderedlist>
</sect2>
</sect1>
</chapter>
<chapter id="Development"><title>Developing Cipher Algorithms</title>
@@ -1072,625 +808,19 @@ kernel crypto API | Caller
</sect1>
</chapter>
<chapter id="User"><title>User Space Interface</title>
<sect1><title>Introduction</title>
<para>
The concepts of the kernel crypto API visible to kernel space is fully
applicable to the user space interface as well. Therefore, the kernel
crypto API high level discussion for the in-kernel use cases applies
here as well.
</para>
<para>
The major difference, however, is that user space can only act as a
consumer and never as a provider of a transformation or cipher algorithm.
</para>
<para>
The following covers the user space interface exported by the kernel
crypto API. A working example of this description is libkcapi that
can be obtained from [1]. That library can be used by user space
applications that require cryptographic services from the kernel.
</para>
<para>
Some details of the in-kernel kernel crypto API aspects do not
apply to user space, however. This includes the difference between
synchronous and asynchronous invocations. The user space API call
is fully synchronous.
</para>
<para>
[1] <ulink url="http://www.chronox.de/libkcapi.html">http://www.chronox.de/libkcapi.html</ulink>
</para>
</sect1>
<sect1><title>User Space API General Remarks</title>
<para>
The kernel crypto API is accessible from user space. Currently,
the following ciphers are accessible:
</para>
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
<para>Message digest including keyed message digest (HMAC, CMAC)</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para>Symmetric ciphers</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para>AEAD ciphers</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para>Random Number Generators</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
<para>
The interface is provided via socket type using the type AF_ALG.
In addition, the setsockopt option type is SOL_ALG. In case the
user space header files do not export these flags yet, use the
following macros:
</para>
<programlisting>
#ifndef AF_ALG
#define AF_ALG 38
#endif
#ifndef SOL_ALG
#define SOL_ALG 279
#endif
</programlisting>
<para>
A cipher is accessed with the same name as done for the in-kernel
API calls. This includes the generic vs. unique naming schema for
ciphers as well as the enforcement of priorities for generic names.
</para>
<para>
To interact with the kernel crypto API, a socket must be
created by the user space application. User space invokes the cipher
operation with the send()/write() system call family. The result of the
cipher operation is obtained with the read()/recv() system call family.
</para>
<para>
The following API calls assume that the socket descriptor
is already opened by the user space application and discusses only
the kernel crypto API specific invocations.
</para>
<para>
To initialize the socket interface, the following sequence has to
be performed by the consumer:
</para>
<orderedlist>
<listitem>
<para>
Create a socket of type AF_ALG with the struct sockaddr_alg
parameter specified below for the different cipher types.
</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para>
Invoke bind with the socket descriptor
</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para>
Invoke accept with the socket descriptor. The accept system call
returns a new file descriptor that is to be used to interact with
the particular cipher instance. When invoking send/write or recv/read
system calls to send data to the kernel or obtain data from the
kernel, the file descriptor returned by accept must be used.
</para>
</listitem>
</orderedlist>
</sect1>
<sect1><title>In-place Cipher operation</title>
<para>
Just like the in-kernel operation of the kernel crypto API, the user
space interface allows the cipher operation in-place. That means that
the input buffer used for the send/write system call and the output
buffer used by the read/recv system call may be one and the same.
This is of particular interest for symmetric cipher operations where a
copying of the output data to its final destination can be avoided.
</para>
<para>
If a consumer on the other hand wants to maintain the plaintext and
the ciphertext in different memory locations, all a consumer needs
to do is to provide different memory pointers for the encryption and
decryption operation.
</para>
</sect1>
<sect1><title>Message Digest API</title>
<para>
The message digest type to be used for the cipher operation is
selected when invoking the bind syscall. bind requires the caller
to provide a filled struct sockaddr data structure. This data
structure must be filled as follows:
</para>
<programlisting>
struct sockaddr_alg sa = {
.salg_family = AF_ALG,
.salg_type = "hash", /* this selects the hash logic in the kernel */
.salg_name = "sha1" /* this is the cipher name */
};
</programlisting>
<para>
The salg_type value "hash" applies to message digests and keyed
message digests. Though, a keyed message digest is referenced by
the appropriate salg_name. Please see below for the setsockopt
interface that explains how the key can be set for a keyed message
digest.
</para>
<para>
Using the send() system call, the application provides the data that
should be processed with the message digest. The send system call
allows the following flags to be specified:
</para>
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
<para>
MSG_MORE: If this flag is set, the send system call acts like a
message digest update function where the final hash is not
yet calculated. If the flag is not set, the send system call
calculates the final message digest immediately.
</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
<para>
With the recv() system call, the application can read the message
digest from the kernel crypto API. If the buffer is too small for the
message digest, the flag MSG_TRUNC is set by the kernel.
</para>
<para>
In order to set a message digest key, the calling application must use
the setsockopt() option of ALG_SET_KEY. If the key is not set the HMAC
operation is performed without the initial HMAC state change caused by
the key.
</para>
</sect1>
<sect1><title>Symmetric Cipher API</title>
<para>
The operation is very similar to the message digest discussion.
During initialization, the struct sockaddr data structure must be
filled as follows:
</para>
<programlisting>
struct sockaddr_alg sa = {
.salg_family = AF_ALG,
.salg_type = "skcipher", /* this selects the symmetric cipher */
.salg_name = "cbc(aes)" /* this is the cipher name */
};
</programlisting>
<para>
Before data can be sent to the kernel using the write/send system
call family, the consumer must set the key. The key setting is
described with the setsockopt invocation below.
</para>
<para>
Using the sendmsg() system call, the application provides the data that should be processed for encryption or decryption. In addition, the IV is
specified with the data structure provided by the sendmsg() system call.
</para>
<para>
The sendmsg system call parameter of struct msghdr is embedded into the
struct cmsghdr data structure. See recv(2) and cmsg(3) for more
information on how the cmsghdr data structure is used together with the
send/recv system call family. That cmsghdr data structure holds the
following information specified with a separate header instances:
</para>
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
<para>
specification of the cipher operation type with one of these flags:
</para>
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
<para>ALG_OP_ENCRYPT - encryption of data</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para>ALG_OP_DECRYPT - decryption of data</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para>
specification of the IV information marked with the flag ALG_SET_IV
</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
<para>
The send system call family allows the following flag to be specified:
</para>
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
<para>
MSG_MORE: If this flag is set, the send system call acts like a
cipher update function where more input data is expected
with a subsequent invocation of the send system call.
</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
<para>
Note: The kernel reports -EINVAL for any unexpected data. The caller
must make sure that all data matches the constraints given in
/proc/crypto for the selected cipher.
</para>
<para>
With the recv() system call, the application can read the result of
the cipher operation from the kernel crypto API. The output buffer
must be at least as large as to hold all blocks of the encrypted or
decrypted data. If the output data size is smaller, only as many
blocks are returned that fit into that output buffer size.
</para>
</sect1>
<sect1><title>AEAD Cipher API</title>
<para>
The operation is very similar to the symmetric cipher discussion.
During initialization, the struct sockaddr data structure must be
filled as follows:
</para>
<programlisting>
struct sockaddr_alg sa = {
.salg_family = AF_ALG,
.salg_type = "aead", /* this selects the symmetric cipher */
.salg_name = "gcm(aes)" /* this is the cipher name */
};
</programlisting>
<para>
Before data can be sent to the kernel using the write/send system
call family, the consumer must set the key. The key setting is
described with the setsockopt invocation below.
</para>
<para>
In addition, before data can be sent to the kernel using the
write/send system call family, the consumer must set the authentication
tag size. To set the authentication tag size, the caller must use the
setsockopt invocation described below.
</para>
<para>
Using the sendmsg() system call, the application provides the data that should be processed for encryption or decryption. In addition, the IV is
specified with the data structure provided by the sendmsg() system call.
</para>
<para>
The sendmsg system call parameter of struct msghdr is embedded into the
struct cmsghdr data structure. See recv(2) and cmsg(3) for more
information on how the cmsghdr data structure is used together with the
send/recv system call family. That cmsghdr data structure holds the
following information specified with a separate header instances:
</para>
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
<para>
specification of the cipher operation type with one of these flags:
</para>
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
<para>ALG_OP_ENCRYPT - encryption of data</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para>ALG_OP_DECRYPT - decryption of data</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para>
specification of the IV information marked with the flag ALG_SET_IV
</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para>
specification of the associated authentication data (AAD) with the
flag ALG_SET_AEAD_ASSOCLEN. The AAD is sent to the kernel together
with the plaintext / ciphertext. See below for the memory structure.
</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
<para>
The send system call family allows the following flag to be specified:
</para>
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
<para>
MSG_MORE: If this flag is set, the send system call acts like a
cipher update function where more input data is expected
with a subsequent invocation of the send system call.
</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
<para>
Note: The kernel reports -EINVAL for any unexpected data. The caller
must make sure that all data matches the constraints given in
/proc/crypto for the selected cipher.
</para>
<para>
With the recv() system call, the application can read the result of
the cipher operation from the kernel crypto API. The output buffer
must be at least as large as defined with the memory structure below.
If the output data size is smaller, the cipher operation is not performed.
</para>
<para>
The authenticated decryption operation may indicate an integrity error.
Such breach in integrity is marked with the -EBADMSG error code.
</para>
<sect2><title>AEAD Memory Structure</title>
<para>
The AEAD cipher operates with the following information that
is communicated between user and kernel space as one data stream:
</para>
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
<para>plaintext or ciphertext</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para>associated authentication data (AAD)</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para>authentication tag</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
<para>
The sizes of the AAD and the authentication tag are provided with
the sendmsg and setsockopt calls (see there). As the kernel knows
the size of the entire data stream, the kernel is now able to
calculate the right offsets of the data components in the data
stream.
</para>
<para>
The user space caller must arrange the aforementioned information
in the following order:
</para>
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
<para>
AEAD encryption input: AAD || plaintext
</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para>
AEAD decryption input: AAD || ciphertext || authentication tag
</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
<para>
The output buffer the user space caller provides must be at least as
large to hold the following data:
</para>
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
<para>
AEAD encryption output: ciphertext || authentication tag
</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para>
AEAD decryption output: plaintext
</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
</sect2>
</sect1>
<sect1><title>Random Number Generator API</title>
<para>
Again, the operation is very similar to the other APIs.
During initialization, the struct sockaddr data structure must be
filled as follows:
</para>
<programlisting>
struct sockaddr_alg sa = {
.salg_family = AF_ALG,
.salg_type = "rng", /* this selects the symmetric cipher */
.salg_name = "drbg_nopr_sha256" /* this is the cipher name */
};
</programlisting>
<para>
Depending on the RNG type, the RNG must be seeded. The seed is provided
using the setsockopt interface to set the key. For example, the
ansi_cprng requires a seed. The DRBGs do not require a seed, but
may be seeded.
</para>
<para>
Using the read()/recvmsg() system calls, random numbers can be obtained.
The kernel generates at most 128 bytes in one call. If user space
requires more data, multiple calls to read()/recvmsg() must be made.
</para>
<para>
WARNING: The user space caller may invoke the initially mentioned
accept system call multiple times. In this case, the returned file
descriptors have the same state.
</para>
</sect1>
<sect1><title>Zero-Copy Interface</title>
<para>
In addition to the send/write/read/recv system call family, the AF_ALG
interface can be accessed with the zero-copy interface of splice/vmsplice.
As the name indicates, the kernel tries to avoid a copy operation into
kernel space.
</para>
<para>
The zero-copy operation requires data to be aligned at the page boundary.
Non-aligned data can be used as well, but may require more operations of
the kernel which would defeat the speed gains obtained from the zero-copy
interface.
</para>
<para>
The system-interent limit for the size of one zero-copy operation is
16 pages. If more data is to be sent to AF_ALG, user space must slice
the input into segments with a maximum size of 16 pages.
</para>
<para>
Zero-copy can be used with the following code example (a complete working
example is provided with libkcapi):
</para>
<programlisting>
int pipes[2];
pipe(pipes);
/* input data in iov */
vmsplice(pipes[1], iov, iovlen, SPLICE_F_GIFT);
/* opfd is the file descriptor returned from accept() system call */
splice(pipes[0], NULL, opfd, NULL, ret, 0);
read(opfd, out, outlen);
</programlisting>
</sect1>
<sect1><title>Setsockopt Interface</title>
<para>
In addition to the read/recv and send/write system call handling
to send and retrieve data subject to the cipher operation, a consumer
also needs to set the additional information for the cipher operation.
This additional information is set using the setsockopt system call
that must be invoked with the file descriptor of the open cipher
(i.e. the file descriptor returned by the accept system call).
</para>
<para>
Each setsockopt invocation must use the level SOL_ALG.
</para>
<para>
The setsockopt interface allows setting the following data using
the mentioned optname:
</para>
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
<para>
ALG_SET_KEY -- Setting the key. Key setting is applicable to:
</para>
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
<para>the skcipher cipher type (symmetric ciphers)</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para>the hash cipher type (keyed message digests)</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para>the AEAD cipher type</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para>the RNG cipher type to provide the seed</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para>
ALG_SET_AEAD_AUTHSIZE -- Setting the authentication tag size
for AEAD ciphers. For a encryption operation, the authentication
tag of the given size will be generated. For a decryption operation,
the provided ciphertext is assumed to contain an authentication tag
of the given size (see section about AEAD memory layout below).
</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
</sect1>
<sect1><title>User space API example</title>
<para>
Please see [1] for libkcapi which provides an easy-to-use wrapper
around the aforementioned Netlink kernel interface. [1] also contains
a test application that invokes all libkcapi API calls.
</para>
<para>
[1] <ulink url="http://www.chronox.de/libkcapi.html">http://www.chronox.de/libkcapi.html</ulink>
</para>
</sect1>
</chapter>
<chapter id="API"><title>Programming Interface</title>
<para>
Please note that the kernel crypto API contains the AEAD givcrypt
API (crypto_aead_giv* and aead_givcrypt_* function calls in
include/crypto/aead.h). This API is obsolete and will be removed
in the future. To obtain the functionality of an AEAD cipher with
internal IV generation, use the IV generator as a regular cipher.
For example, rfc4106(gcm(aes)) is the AEAD cipher with external
IV generation and seqniv(rfc4106(gcm(aes))) implies that the kernel
crypto API generates the IV. Different IV generators are available.
</para>
<sect1><title>Block Cipher Context Data Structures</title>
!Pinclude/linux/crypto.h Block Cipher Context Data Structures
!Finclude/crypto/aead.h aead_request
!Finclude/linux/crypto.h aead_request
</sect1>
<sect1><title>Block Cipher Algorithm Definitions</title>
!Pinclude/linux/crypto.h Block Cipher Algorithm Definitions
!Finclude/linux/crypto.h crypto_alg
!Finclude/linux/crypto.h ablkcipher_alg
!Finclude/crypto/aead.h aead_alg
!Finclude/linux/crypto.h aead_alg
!Finclude/linux/crypto.h blkcipher_alg
!Finclude/linux/crypto.h cipher_alg
!Finclude/crypto/rng.h rng_alg
!Finclude/linux/crypto.h rng_alg
</sect1>
<sect1><title>Asynchronous Block Cipher API</title>
!Pinclude/linux/crypto.h Asynchronous Block Cipher API
@@ -1714,27 +844,26 @@ read(opfd, out, outlen);
!Finclude/linux/crypto.h ablkcipher_request_set_crypt
</sect1>
<sect1><title>Authenticated Encryption With Associated Data (AEAD) Cipher API</title>
!Pinclude/crypto/aead.h Authenticated Encryption With Associated Data (AEAD) Cipher API
!Finclude/crypto/aead.h crypto_alloc_aead
!Finclude/crypto/aead.h crypto_free_aead
!Finclude/crypto/aead.h crypto_aead_ivsize
!Finclude/crypto/aead.h crypto_aead_authsize
!Finclude/crypto/aead.h crypto_aead_blocksize
!Finclude/crypto/aead.h crypto_aead_setkey
!Finclude/crypto/aead.h crypto_aead_setauthsize
!Finclude/crypto/aead.h crypto_aead_encrypt
!Finclude/crypto/aead.h crypto_aead_decrypt
!Pinclude/linux/crypto.h Authenticated Encryption With Associated Data (AEAD) Cipher API
!Finclude/linux/crypto.h crypto_alloc_aead
!Finclude/linux/crypto.h crypto_free_aead
!Finclude/linux/crypto.h crypto_aead_ivsize
!Finclude/linux/crypto.h crypto_aead_authsize
!Finclude/linux/crypto.h crypto_aead_blocksize
!Finclude/linux/crypto.h crypto_aead_setkey
!Finclude/linux/crypto.h crypto_aead_setauthsize
!Finclude/linux/crypto.h crypto_aead_encrypt
!Finclude/linux/crypto.h crypto_aead_decrypt
</sect1>
<sect1><title>Asynchronous AEAD Request Handle</title>
!Pinclude/crypto/aead.h Asynchronous AEAD Request Handle
!Finclude/crypto/aead.h crypto_aead_reqsize
!Finclude/crypto/aead.h aead_request_set_tfm
!Finclude/crypto/aead.h aead_request_alloc
!Finclude/crypto/aead.h aead_request_free
!Finclude/crypto/aead.h aead_request_set_callback
!Finclude/crypto/aead.h aead_request_set_crypt
!Finclude/crypto/aead.h aead_request_set_assoc
!Finclude/crypto/aead.h aead_request_set_ad
!Pinclude/linux/crypto.h Asynchronous AEAD Request Handle
!Finclude/linux/crypto.h crypto_aead_reqsize
!Finclude/linux/crypto.h aead_request_set_tfm
!Finclude/linux/crypto.h aead_request_alloc
!Finclude/linux/crypto.h aead_request_free
!Finclude/linux/crypto.h aead_request_set_callback
!Finclude/linux/crypto.h aead_request_set_crypt
!Finclude/linux/crypto.h aead_request_set_assoc
</sect1>
<sect1><title>Synchronous Block Cipher API</title>
!Pinclude/linux/crypto.h Synchronous Block Cipher API

View File

@@ -66,7 +66,6 @@
!Ekernel/time/hrtimer.c
</sect1>
<sect1><title>Workqueues and Kevents</title>
!Iinclude/linux/workqueue.h
!Ekernel/workqueue.c
</sect1>
<sect1><title>Internal Functions</title>
@@ -217,111 +216,6 @@ X!Isound/sound_firmware.c
-->
</chapter>
<chapter id="mediadev">
<title>Media Devices</title>
<sect1><title>Video2Linux devices</title>
!Iinclude/media/tuner.h
!Iinclude/media/tuner-types.h
!Iinclude/media/tveeprom.h
!Iinclude/media/v4l2-async.h
!Iinclude/media/v4l2-ctrls.h
!Iinclude/media/v4l2-dv-timings.h
!Iinclude/media/v4l2-event.h
!Iinclude/media/v4l2-flash-led-class.h
!Iinclude/media/v4l2-mediabus.h
!Iinclude/media/v4l2-mem2mem.h
!Iinclude/media/v4l2-of.h
!Iinclude/media/v4l2-subdev.h
!Iinclude/media/videobuf2-core.h
!Iinclude/media/videobuf2-v4l2.h
!Iinclude/media/videobuf2-memops.h
</sect1>
<sect1><title>Digital TV (DVB) devices</title>
!Idrivers/media/dvb-core/dvb_ca_en50221.h
!Idrivers/media/dvb-core/dvb_frontend.h
!Idrivers/media/dvb-core/dvb_math.h
!Idrivers/media/dvb-core/dvb_ringbuffer.h
!Idrivers/media/dvb-core/dvbdev.h
<sect1><title>Digital TV Demux API</title>
<para>The kernel demux API defines a driver-internal interface for
registering low-level, hardware specific driver to a hardware
independent demux layer. It is only of interest for Digital TV
device driver writers. The header file for this API is named
<constant>demux.h</constant> and located in
<constant>drivers/media/dvb-core</constant>.</para>
<para>The demux API should be implemented for each demux in the
system. It is used to select the TS source of a demux and to manage
the demux resources. When the demux client allocates a resource via
the demux API, it receives a pointer to the API of that
resource.</para>
<para>Each demux receives its TS input from a DVB front-end or from
memory, as set via this demux API. In a system with more than one
front-end, the API can be used to select one of the DVB front-ends
as a TS source for a demux, unless this is fixed in the HW platform.
The demux API only controls front-ends regarding to their connections
with demuxes; the APIs used to set the other front-end parameters,
such as tuning, are not defined in this document.</para>
<para>The functions that implement the abstract interface demux should
be defined static or module private and registered to the Demux
core for external access. It is not necessary to implement every
function in the struct <constant>dmx_demux</constant>. For example,
a demux interface might support Section filtering, but not PES
filtering. The API client is expected to check the value of any
function pointer before calling the function: the value of NULL means
that the &#8220;function is not available&#8221;.</para>
<para>Whenever the functions of the demux API modify shared data,
the possibilities of lost update and race condition problems should
be addressed, e.g. by protecting parts of code with mutexes.</para>
<para>Note that functions called from a bottom half context must not
sleep. Even a simple memory allocation without using GFP_ATOMIC can
result in a kernel thread being put to sleep if swapping is needed.
For example, the Linux kernel calls the functions of a network device
interface from a bottom half context. Thus, if a demux API function
is called from network device code, the function must not sleep.
</para>
</sect1>
<section id="demux_callback_api">
<title>Demux Callback API</title>
<para>This kernel-space API comprises the callback functions that
deliver filtered data to the demux client. Unlike the other DVB
kABIs, these functions are provided by the client and called from
the demux code.</para>
<para>The function pointers of this abstract interface are not
packed into a structure as in the other demux APIs, because the
callback functions are registered and used independent of each
other. As an example, it is possible for the API client to provide
several callback functions for receiving TS packets and no
callbacks for PES packets or sections.</para>
<para>The functions that implement the callback API need not be
re-entrant: when a demux driver calls one of these functions,
the driver is not allowed to call the function again before
the original call returns. If a callback is triggered by a
hardware interrupt, it is recommended to use the Linux
&#8220;bottom half&#8221; mechanism or start a tasklet instead of
making the callback function call directly from a hardware
interrupt.</para>
<para>This mechanism is implemented by
<link linkend='API-dmx-ts-cb'>dmx_ts_cb()</link> and
<link linkend='API-dmx-section-cb'>dmx_section_cb()</link>.</para>
</section>
!Idrivers/media/dvb-core/demux.h
</sect1>
<sect1><title>Remote Controller devices</title>
!Iinclude/media/rc-core.h
!Iinclude/media/lirc_dev.h
</sect1>
<sect1><title>Media Controller devices</title>
!Iinclude/media/media-device.h
!Iinclude/media/media-devnode.h
!Iinclude/media/media-entity.h
</sect1>
</chapter>
<chapter id="uart16x50">
<title>16x50 UART Driver</title>
!Edrivers/tty/serial/serial_core.c
@@ -561,31 +455,4 @@ X!Ilib/fonts/fonts.c
!Edrivers/hsi/hsi.c
</chapter>
<chapter id="pwm">
<title>Pulse-Width Modulation (PWM)</title>
<para>
Pulse-width modulation is a modulation technique primarily used to
control power supplied to electrical devices.
</para>
<para>
The PWM framework provides an abstraction for providers and consumers
of PWM signals. A controller that provides one or more PWM signals is
registered as <structname>struct pwm_chip</structname>. Providers are
expected to embed this structure in a driver-specific structure. This
structure contains fields that describe a particular chip.
</para>
<para>
A chip exposes one or more PWM signal sources, each of which exposed
as a <structname>struct pwm_device</structname>. Operations can be
performed on PWM devices to control the period, duty cycle, polarity
and active state of the signal.
</para>
<para>
Note that PWM devices are exclusive resources: they can always only be
used by one consumer at a time.
</para>
!Iinclude/linux/pwm.h
!Edrivers/pwm/core.c
</chapter>
</book>

File diff suppressed because it is too large Load Diff

View File

@@ -146,30 +146,36 @@
The journalling layer is easy to use. You need to
first of all create a journal_t data structure. There are
two calls to do this dependent on how you decide to allocate the physical
media on which the journal resides. The jbd2_journal_init_inode() call
is for journals stored in filesystem inodes, or the jbd2_journal_init_dev()
call can be used for journal stored on a raw device (in a continuous range
media on which the journal resides. The journal_init_inode() call
is for journals stored in filesystem inodes, or the journal_init_dev()
call can be use for journal stored on a raw device (in a continuous range
of blocks). A journal_t is a typedef for a struct pointer, so when
you are finally finished make sure you call jbd2_journal_destroy() on it
you are finally finished make sure you call journal_destroy() on it
to free up any used kernel memory.
</para>
<para>
Once you have got your journal_t object you need to 'mount' or load the journal
file. The journalling layer expects the space for the journal was already
allocated and initialized properly by the userspace tools. When loading the
journal you must call jbd2_journal_load() to process journal contents. If the
client file system detects the journal contents does not need to be processed
(or even need not have valid contents), it may call jbd2_journal_wipe() to
clear the journal contents before calling jbd2_journal_load().
file, unless of course you haven't initialised it yet - in which case you
need to call journal_create().
</para>
<para>
Note that jbd2_journal_wipe(..,0) calls jbd2_journal_skip_recovery() for you if
it detects any outstanding transactions in the journal and similarly
jbd2_journal_load() will call jbd2_journal_recover() if necessary. I would
advise reading ext4_load_journal() in fs/ext4/super.c for examples on this
stage.
Most of the time however your journal file will already have been created, but
before you load it you must call journal_wipe() to empty the journal file.
Hang on, you say , what if the filesystem wasn't cleanly umount()'d . Well, it is the
job of the client file system to detect this and skip the call to journal_wipe().
</para>
<para>
In either case the next call should be to journal_load() which prepares the
journal file for use. Note that journal_wipe(..,0) calls journal_skip_recovery()
for you if it detects any outstanding transactions in the journal and similarly
journal_load() will call journal_recover() if necessary.
I would advise reading fs/ext3/super.c for examples on this stage.
[RGG: Why is the journal_wipe() call necessary - doesn't this needlessly
complicate the API. Or isn't a good idea for the journal layer to hide
dirty mounts from the client fs]
</para>
<para>
@@ -183,41 +189,41 @@ You still need to actually journal your filesystem changes, this
is done by wrapping them into transactions. Additionally you
also need to wrap the modification of each of the buffers
with calls to the journal layer, so it knows what the modifications
you are actually making are. To do this use jbd2_journal_start() which
you are actually making are. To do this use journal_start() which
returns a transaction handle.
</para>
<para>
jbd2_journal_start()
and its counterpart jbd2_journal_stop(), which indicates the end of a
transaction are nestable calls, so you can reenter a transaction if necessary,
but remember you must call jbd2_journal_stop() the same number of times as
jbd2_journal_start() before the transaction is completed (or more accurately
leaves the update phase). Ext4/VFS makes use of this feature to simplify
handling of inode dirtying, quota support, etc.
journal_start()
and its counterpart journal_stop(), which indicates the end of a transaction
are nestable calls, so you can reenter a transaction if necessary,
but remember you must call journal_stop() the same number of times as
journal_start() before the transaction is completed (or more accurately
leaves the update phase). Ext3/VFS makes use of this feature to simplify
quota support.
</para>
<para>
Inside each transaction you need to wrap the modifications to the
individual buffers (blocks). Before you start to modify a buffer you
need to call jbd2_journal_get_{create,write,undo}_access() as appropriate,
need to call journal_get_{create,write,undo}_access() as appropriate,
this allows the journalling layer to copy the unmodified data if it
needs to. After all the buffer may be part of a previously uncommitted
transaction.
At this point you are at last ready to modify a buffer, and once
you are have done so you need to call jbd2_journal_dirty_{meta,}data().
you are have done so you need to call journal_dirty_{meta,}data().
Or if you've asked for access to a buffer you now know is now longer
required to be pushed back on the device you can call jbd2_journal_forget()
required to be pushed back on the device you can call journal_forget()
in much the same way as you might have used bforget() in the past.
</para>
<para>
A jbd2_journal_flush() may be called at any time to commit and checkpoint
A journal_flush() may be called at any time to commit and checkpoint
all your transactions.
</para>
<para>
Then at umount time , in your put_super() you can then call jbd2_journal_destroy()
Then at umount time , in your put_super() you can then call journal_destroy()
to clean up your in-core journal object.
</para>
@@ -225,74 +231,82 @@ to clean up your in-core journal object.
Unfortunately there a couple of ways the journal layer can cause a deadlock.
The first thing to note is that each task can only have
a single outstanding transaction at any one time, remember nothing
commits until the outermost jbd2_journal_stop(). This means
commits until the outermost journal_stop(). This means
you must complete the transaction at the end of each file/inode/address
etc. operation you perform, so that the journalling system isn't re-entered
on another journal. Since transactions can't be nested/batched
across differing journals, and another filesystem other than
yours (say ext4) may be modified in a later syscall.
yours (say ext3) may be modified in a later syscall.
</para>
<para>
The second case to bear in mind is that jbd2_journal_start() can
The second case to bear in mind is that journal_start() can
block if there isn't enough space in the journal for your transaction
(based on the passed nblocks param) - when it blocks it merely(!) needs to
wait for transactions to complete and be committed from other tasks,
so essentially we are waiting for jbd2_journal_stop(). So to avoid
deadlocks you must treat jbd2_journal_start/stop() as if they
so essentially we are waiting for journal_stop(). So to avoid
deadlocks you must treat journal_start/stop() as if they
were semaphores and include them in your semaphore ordering rules to prevent
deadlocks. Note that jbd2_journal_extend() has similar blocking behaviour to
jbd2_journal_start() so you can deadlock here just as easily as on
jbd2_journal_start().
deadlocks. Note that journal_extend() has similar blocking behaviour to
journal_start() so you can deadlock here just as easily as on journal_start().
</para>
<para>
Try to reserve the right number of blocks the first time. ;-). This will
be the maximum number of blocks you are going to touch in this transaction.
I advise having a look at at least ext4_jbd.h to see the basis on which
ext4 uses to make these decisions.
I advise having a look at at least ext3_jbd.h to see the basis on which
ext3 uses to make these decisions.
</para>
<para>
Another wriggle to watch out for is your on-disk block allocation strategy.
Why? Because, if you do a delete, you need to ensure you haven't reused any
of the freed blocks until the transaction freeing these blocks commits. If you
reused these blocks and crash happens, there is no way to restore the contents
of the reallocated blocks at the end of the last fully committed transaction.
One simple way of doing this is to mark blocks as free in internal in-memory
block allocation structures only after the transaction freeing them commits.
Ext4 uses journal commit callback for this purpose.
why? Because, if you undo a delete, you need to ensure you haven't reused any
of the freed blocks in a later transaction. One simple way of doing this
is make sure any blocks you allocate only have checkpointed transactions
listed against them. Ext3 does this in ext3_test_allocatable().
</para>
<para>
With journal commit callbacks you can ask the journalling layer to call a
callback function when the transaction is finally committed to disk, so that
you can do some of your own management. You ask the journalling layer for
calling the callback by simply setting journal->j_commit_callback function
pointer and that function is called after each transaction commit. You can also
use transaction->t_private_list for attaching entries to a transaction that
need processing when the transaction commits.
</para>
<para>
JBD2 also provides a way to block all transaction updates via
jbd2_journal_{un,}lock_updates(). Ext4 uses this when it wants a window with a
clean and stable fs for a moment. E.g.
Lock is also providing through journal_{un,}lock_updates(),
ext3 uses this when it wants a window with a clean and stable fs for a moment.
eg.
</para>
<programlisting>
jbd2_journal_lock_updates() //stop new stuff happening..
jbd2_journal_flush() // checkpoint everything.
journal_lock_updates() //stop new stuff happening..
journal_flush() // checkpoint everything.
..do stuff on stable fs
jbd2_journal_unlock_updates() // carry on with filesystem use.
journal_unlock_updates() // carry on with filesystem use.
</programlisting>
<para>
The opportunities for abuse and DOS attacks with this should be obvious,
if you allow unprivileged userspace to trigger codepaths containing these
calls.
</para>
<para>
A new feature of jbd since 2.5.25 is commit callbacks with the new
journal_callback_set() function you can now ask the journalling layer
to call you back when the transaction is finally committed to disk, so that
you can do some of your own management. The key to this is the journal_callback
struct, this maintains the internal callback information but you can
extend it like this:-
</para>
<programlisting>
struct myfs_callback_s {
//Data structure element required by jbd..
struct journal_callback for_jbd;
// Stuff for myfs allocated together.
myfs_inode* i_commited;
}
</programlisting>
<para>
this would be useful if you needed to know when data was committed to a
particular inode.
</para>
</sect2>
@@ -305,6 +319,36 @@ being each mount, each modification (transaction) and each changed buffer
to tell the journalling layer about them.
</para>
<para>
Here is a some pseudo code to give you an idea of how it works, as
an example.
</para>
<programlisting>
journal_t* my_jnrl = journal_create();
journal_init_{dev,inode}(jnrl,...)
if (clean) journal_wipe();
journal_load();
foreach(transaction) { /*transactions must be
completed before
a syscall returns to
userspace*/
handle_t * xct=journal_start(my_jnrl);
foreach(bh) {
journal_get_{create,write,undo}_access(xact,bh);
if ( myfs_modify(bh) ) { /* returns true
if makes changes */
journal_dirty_{meta,}data(xact,bh);
} else {
journal_forget(bh);
}
}
journal_stop(xct);
}
journal_destroy(my_jrnl);
</programlisting>
</sect2>
</sect1>
@@ -313,13 +357,13 @@ to tell the journalling layer about them.
<title>Data Types</title>
<para>
The journalling layer uses typedefs to 'hide' the concrete definitions
of the structures used. As a client of the JBD2 layer you can
of the structures used. As a client of the JBD layer you can
just rely on the using the pointer as a magic cookie of some sort.
Obviously the hiding is not enforced as this is 'C'.
</para>
<sect2 id="structures"><title>Structures</title>
!Iinclude/linux/jbd2.h
!Iinclude/linux/jbd.h
</sect2>
</sect1>
@@ -331,11 +375,11 @@ to tell the journalling layer about them.
manage transactions
</para>
<sect2 id="journal_level"><title>Journal Level</title>
!Efs/jbd2/journal.c
!Ifs/jbd2/recovery.c
!Efs/jbd/journal.c
!Ifs/jbd/recovery.c
</sect2>
<sect2 id="transaction_level"><title>Transasction Level</title>
!Efs/jbd2/transaction.c
!Efs/jbd/transaction.c
</sect2>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="see_also">

Some files were not shown because too many files have changed in this diff Show More